Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 241

Loop-IP6700

TDMoEthernet
Users Manual

LOOP TELECOMMUNICATION INTERNATIONAL, INC.


8F, NO. 8, HSIN ANN RD.
SCIENCE-BASED INDUSTRIAL PARK
HSINCHU, TAIWAN
Tel:
+886-3-578-7696
Fax:
+886-3-578-7695

2009 Loop Telecommunication International, Inc. All rights reserved.


Version 21

09 APR 2009

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION................................................................................................1
Description ............................................................................................................1
Features ................................................................................................................1
Applications...........................................................................................................1
Specifications ........................................................................................................2

2
2.1
2.2
2.3

INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................5
Site Selection ........................................................................................................5
Mechanical Installation..........................................................................................6
TDMoEthernet Theory of Operation ...........................................................21
2.3.1 Clock Recovery...................................................................................................22
2.3.2 Bundles ...............................................................................................................22

3
3.1

OPERATION....................................................................................................................23
Quick Start for Loop-IP6700 ...............................................................................23
3.1.1 Power On ............................................................................................................23
3.2
Self Test..............................................................................................................23
3.3
Return to Default.................................................................................................23
3.4
Using Terminal....................................................................................................23
3.5
System Configuration..........................................................................................24
3.5.1 Console Port .......................................................................................................24
3.6
Alarm...................................................................................................................24
3.7
Reports ...............................................................................................................25
3.8
LED .....................................................................................................................26
3.9
Management Port (SNMP Port) ..........................................................................27
3.10
User Data Port (Ethernet) ...................................................................................27
4
4.1
4.2

4.3
5
5.1

MAINTENANCE...............................................................................................................28
Self-Test..............................................................................................................28
Near End Loopback ............................................................................................28
4.2.1 E1/T1 Line Loopback ..........................................................................................28
4.2.2 E1/T1 Payload Loopback....................................................................................28
Far End Loopback...............................................................................................29
TERMINAL OPERATION.................................................................................................30
Logon ..................................................................................................................33
5.1.1 System Setup......................................................................................................34
5.1.1.1
System .......................................................................................................35
Figure 5- 6 SNMP management diagram....................................................................37
5.1.1.2
Inband Management ..................................................................................38
5.1.1.3
Password/Changing a Password ...............................................................40
5.1.1.4
Port Speed Setup .......................................................................................44
5.1.2 Time Slot IP Assignment.....................................................................................46
5.1.2.1
Bundle IP Setup .........................................................................................47
5.1.2.2
Time Slot IP Setup .....................................................................................48
5.1.3 Firmware Transfer...............................................................................................53
5.1.3.1
Download Mainboard Firmware .................................................................54
5.1.3.2
Download Boot Strapper ............................................................................56
5.1.3.3
Download Current Configuration................................................................58
5.1.3.4
Upload Current Configuration from FLASH ...............................................59
5.1.4 Store/Retrieve Configuration ..............................................................................61
5.1.5 Clock Source Setup ............................................................................................62
5.1.6 System Alarm Setup ...........................................................................................64
5.1.7 System Configuration..........................................................................................65
5.1.8 Display All Time Slot IP Assignment ................................................................66
5.1.9 Display Time Slot IP Assignment........................................................................67
5.1.10
Clock source Configuration ............................................................................68
5.1.11
Byte and Packet Counters..............................................................................69

5.1.12
5.1.13
5.1.14
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
5.3.7
5.3.8
5.3.9
5.3.10
5.3.11
5.3.12
5.3.13
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
5.5.9
5.5.10
5.5.11
6
6.1

Alarm Queue ..................................................................................................71


Fom Status .....................................................................................................72
All Bundle Counter..........................................................................................73
E1 Sub-Menu ......................................................................................................74
System Setup......................................................................................................75
Loopback Setup ..................................................................................................76
Alarm Setup ........................................................................................................78
Clear Alarm History.............................................................................................79
Send Bert ............................................................................................................80
1-Hour Performance Report ...............................................................................82
24-Hour Performance Report .............................................................................83
Line Availability ...................................................................................................84
Unit Configuration ...............................................................................................84
Unit Status ......................................................................................................85
Unit Alarm History...........................................................................................85
Fom Status .....................................................................................................86
T1 Sub-Menu ......................................................................................................87
System Setup......................................................................................................88
Loopback Setup ..................................................................................................90
Alarm Setup ........................................................................................................91
Bert Test .............................................................................................................93
Clear Performance Data .....................................................................................95
Clear Alarm History.............................................................................................96
1-Hour Performance Report ...............................................................................97
24-Hour Performance Report .............................................................................97
Line Availability ...................................................................................................98
Unit Configuration...........................................................................................98
Unit Status ......................................................................................................99
Unit Alarm History...........................................................................................99
Fom Status ...................................................................................................100
DTE (V.35/V.36/RS232/RS449/EIA530/X.21/RS422) Sub-Menu ....................101
DTE Configuration ............................................................................................102
DTE Status........................................................................................................102
Alarm History ....................................................................................................103
System Setup....................................................................................................103
Loopback Test ..................................................................................................105
Alarm Setup ......................................................................................................106
Clear Alarm History...........................................................................................108
DS3/E3 Sub-Menu ............................................................................................109
System Setup....................................................................................................110
Loopback Setup ................................................................................................112
Clear Performance Data ...................................................................................113
Alarm Setup ......................................................................................................115
Clear Alarm History...........................................................................................117
1-Hour Performance (Perf.) Report ..................................................................118
24-Hour Performance (Perf.) Report ................................................................120
Line Availability .................................................................................................123
Configuration.....................................................................................................124
Status............................................................................................................125
Alarm History ................................................................................................126

FRONT PANEL OPERATION........................................................................................127


Configuration.....................................................................................................132
6.1.1 System ..............................................................................................................132
6.1.1.1
Ethernet....................................................................................................132
6.1.1.2
Lan Port....................................................................................................132
6.1.1.3
Bun ACT Timer.........................................................................................133
6.1.1.4
LPT Timer.................................................................................................133
6.1.1.5
Lan Rate...................................................................................................133

ii

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.1.1.6
CAS Idle code ..........................................................................................134
6.1.1.7
Remote loss .............................................................................................134
6.1.1.8
IP ..............................................................................................................134
6.1.1.9
Date..........................................................................................................135
6.1.1.10
Time .....................................................................................................135
6.1.1.11
SNMP...................................................................................................135
6.1.1.12
Device Name .......................................................................................136
Bundle Setup ....................................................................................................137
6.2.1 Source IP ..........................................................................................................137
6.2.2 Source subnet...................................................................................................137
6.2.3 Gateway IP .......................................................................................................137
6.2.4 Port Select ........................................................................................................138
6.2.5 Bundle ID ..........................................................................................................138
6.2.6 Action ................................................................................................................138
6.2.7 UDP number .....................................................................................................139
6.2.8 Timeslot from ....................................................................................................139
6.2.9 Timeslot num ....................................................................................................140
6.2.10
Destination IP ...............................................................................................140
6.2.11
Cell in bundle ................................................................................................140
6.2.12
Jitter delay ....................................................................................................140
6.2.13
Jitter size.......................................................................................................141
6.2.14
Vlan...............................................................................................................141
6.2.15
Vlan1 ID ........................................................................................................141
6.2.16
Vlan1 priority.................................................................................................142
6.2.17
Vlan2 ID ........................................................................................................142
6.2.18
Vlan2 priority.................................................................................................142
6.2.19
Bundle status ................................................................................................142
6.2.20
Confirm? .......................................................................................................143
Bundle Status....................................................................................................143
6.3.1 Classifi pack RX................................................................................................143
6.3.2 Byte received ....................................................................................................144
6.3.3 Byte transmitted ................................................................................................144
6.3.4 Packet received ................................................................................................144
6.3.5 Packet transmitted ............................................................................................144
6.3.6 LAN WAN SNMP ..............................................................................................145
Alarm.................................................................................................................145
6.4.1 Alarm setup.......................................................................................................145
6.4.1.1
Alarm clock...............................................................................................145
6.4.1.2
Alarm link..................................................................................................146
6.4.2 Alarm status ......................................................................................................146
6.4.3 Alarm clear ........................................................................................................147
Information ........................................................................................................147
6.5.1 Software Version...............................................................................................147
6.5.2 Hardware Version .............................................................................................147
6.5.3 Serial number....................................................................................................148
Miscellaneous ...................................................................................................148
6.6.1 Store Config ......................................................................................................148
6.6.2 Retrieve Config .................................................................................................148
6.6.3 Load Default......................................................................................................149
6.6.4 System reset .....................................................................................................149
E1-CARD Menu ................................................................................................150
6.7.1 Config Setup .....................................................................................................150
6.7.1.1
Frame .......................................................................................................150
6.7.1.2
Code.........................................................................................................150
6.7.1.3
CRC..........................................................................................................151
6.7.1.4
RAI ...........................................................................................................151
6.7.1.5
AIS............................................................................................................151
6.7.1.6
CAS ..........................................................................................................152

iii

6.8

6.9

6.7.1.7
OOS .........................................................................................................152
6.7.1.8
FDL...........................................................................................................152
6.7.1.9
Sa_bit .......................................................................................................153
6.7.1.10
IDLE .....................................................................................................154
6.7.2 Port Status ........................................................................................................154
6.7.2.1
LOF LOS ..................................................................................................154
6.7.2.2
RCV AIS RCV RAI ...................................................................................154
6.7.2.3
XMT AIS XMT RAI ...................................................................................155
6.7.2.4
BPV ES ....................................................................................................155
6.7.3 Port Alarm .........................................................................................................155
6.7.3.1
Alarm Setup..............................................................................................155
6.7.3.2
Port History...............................................................................................157
6.7.3.3
Alarm Clear ..............................................................................................160
6.7.4 Port Loopback...................................................................................................161
6.7.4.1
Local Loopback ........................................................................................161
6.7.4.2
Remote Loopback ....................................................................................161
6.7.4.3
Send Bert .................................................................................................162
6.7.5 Clock Source.....................................................................................................163
6.7.5.1
Master Clock ............................................................................................163
6.7.5.2
Second Clock ...........................................................................................164
6.7.5.3
Current Clock ...........................................................................................165
6.7.5.4
Recover Clock ..........................................................................................166
6.7.5.5
Clock status..............................................................................................166
T1-CARD Menu ................................................................................................167
6.8.1 Config Setup .....................................................................................................167
6.8.1.1
Frame .......................................................................................................167
6.8.1.2
Code.........................................................................................................167
6.8.1.3
CRC..........................................................................................................168
6.8.1.4
RAI ...........................................................................................................168
6.8.1.5
AIS............................................................................................................168
6.8.1.6
CAS ..........................................................................................................169
6.8.1.7
OOS .........................................................................................................169
6.8.1.8
FDL...........................................................................................................170
6.8.1.9
Sa_bit .......................................................................................................170
6.8.1.10
IDLE .....................................................................................................171
6.8.2 Port Status ........................................................................................................171
6.8.2.1
LOF LOS ..................................................................................................171
6.8.2.2
RCV AIS RCV RAI ...................................................................................171
6.8.2.3
XMT AIS XMT RAI ...................................................................................172
6.8.2.4
BPV ES ....................................................................................................172
6.8.3 Port Alarm .........................................................................................................172
6.8.3.1
Alarm Setup..............................................................................................172
6.8.3.2
Port History...............................................................................................174
6.8.3.3
Alarm Clear ..............................................................................................177
6.8.4 Port Loopback...................................................................................................178
6.8.4.1
Local Loopback ........................................................................................178
6.8.4.2
Remote Loopback ....................................................................................178
6.8.4.3
Send Bert .................................................................................................179
6.8.5 Clock Source.....................................................................................................181
6.8.5.1
Master Clock ............................................................................................181
6.8.5.2
Second Clock ...........................................................................................182
6.8.5.3
Current Clock ...........................................................................................183
6.8.5.4
Recover Clock ..........................................................................................184
6.8.5.5
Clock status..............................................................................................184
DTE Menu .........................................................................................................185
6.9.1 Config Setup .....................................................................................................185
6.9.1.1
Mode ........................................................................................................185
6.9.1.2
Rate..........................................................................................................185

iv

6.9.1.3
Tx clock ....................................................................................................186
6.9.1.4
Rx clock....................................................................................................186
6.9.1.5
DATA........................................................................................................186
6.9.1.6
RTS ..........................................................................................................187
6.9.1.7
TTM ..........................................................................................................187
6.9.1.8
DCD..........................................................................................................187
6.9.2 Port Status ........................................................................................................188
6.9.2.1
Exit RTS LOS ...........................................................................................188
6.9.2.2
CLK LOS DSR..........................................................................................188
6.9.2.3
CTS DCD .................................................................................................189
6.9.2.4
DSR RTS..................................................................................................189
6.9.3 Port Alarm .........................................................................................................189
6.9.3.1
Alarm Setup..............................................................................................189
6.9.3.2
Alarm History............................................................................................190
6.9.3.3
Alarm Clear ..............................................................................................190
6.9.4 Port Loopback...................................................................................................191
6.9.4.1
Local Loopback ........................................................................................191
6.9.5 Clock Source.....................................................................................................191
6.9.5.1
Master Clock ............................................................................................191
6.9.5.2
Second Clock ...........................................................................................193
6.9.5.3
Current Clock ...........................................................................................194
6.9.5.4
Recover Clock ..........................................................................................194
6.9.5.5
Clock status..............................................................................................194
6.10
E3/DS3 Menu....................................................................................................195
6.10.1
Config Setup .................................................................................................195
6.10.1.1
Tx Length .............................................................................................195
6.10.1.2
Xmt AIS................................................................................................195
6.10.2
Port Status ....................................................................................................196
6.10.2.1
LOS XMT AIS ......................................................................................196
6.10.2.2
BPV ES ................................................................................................196
6.10.3
Port Alarm.....................................................................................................196
6.10.3.1
Alarm setup..........................................................................................196
6.10.3.2
Port History ..........................................................................................198
6.10.3.3
Alarm clear...........................................................................................199
6.10.4
Port lookback ................................................................................................199
6.10.4.1
Local Loopback....................................................................................199
6.10.5
Clock Source ................................................................................................200
6.10.5.1
Master Clock ........................................................................................200
6.10.5.2
Second Clock.......................................................................................201
6.10.5.3
Current Clock .......................................................................................202
6.10.5.4
Recover Clock......................................................................................202
6.10.5.5
Clock Status.........................................................................................203
7
7.1

STEP BY STEP OPERATION .......................................................................................204


Time Slot IP Assignment...................................................................................204
7.1.1 Time Slot IP Assignment (Add bundle).............................................................204
7.1.2 Time Slot IP Assignment (Delete bundle).........................................................205
7.1.3 Time Slot IP Assignment (Delete all) ................................................................206
7.2 Password Setup ...............................................................................................................206
7.2.1 Enter old password ...............................................................................................206
7.2.2 Enter new password .............................................................................................207
7.2.3 Confirmation of new password .............................................................................207
7.3 Clock source setup ...........................................................................................................208
7.3.1 Clock Application ..............................................................................................209
7.3.1.1
Example of clock source ..........................................................................209
7.4
Wire and Wireless Clock Setup ........................................................................210
8
8.1

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................212


TDMoEthernet Packet Format ..........................................................................212

8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4

VLAN Option .....................................................................................................213


UDP/IP Header .................................................................................................214
TDMoEthernet Control Word ............................................................................215
TDMoEthernet Payload.....................................................................................216
AAL1 PAYLOAD TYPE MACHINE ...................................................................217
Raw Payload Type Machine (SAToP and CESoPSN) .....................................220
Unstructured .....................................................................................................220
Structure without CAS.......................................................................................221
Structure without CAS (without Fragmentation) ...............................................221
Structure without CAS (with Fragmentation) ....................................................223

9
APPENDIX A PROPER JITTER BUFFER SETUP WITH THE LOOP IP6700 FOR APPROPRIATE
JITTER DELAY APPLICATION..............................................................................................224

LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1- 1 APPLICATION DIAGRAM ..................................................................................................................... 1
FIGURE 2- 1 FRONT PANEL VIEW (WITH LCD) ....................................................................................................... 6
FIGURE 2- 2 FRONT PANEL VIEW (WITHOUT LCD) ................................................................................................. 6
FIGURE 2- 3 REAR PANEL VIEWS .......................................................................................................................... 7
FIGURE 2- 4 MAIN BOARD JUMPERS SETTING-E1, RJ (120 OHM)........................................................................... 7
FIGURE 2- 5 MAIN BOARD JUMPERS SETTING-E1, BNC (75 OHM).......................................................................... 7
FIGURE 2- 6 MAIN BOARD JUMPERS SETTING - T1 ................................................................................................ 8
FIGURE 2- 7 DAUGHTER BOARD JUMPERS SETTING - E1, RJ (120 OHM) ................................................................ 9
FIGURE 2- 8 DAUGHTER BOARD JUMPERS SETTING - E1, BNC (75 OHM) ............................................................. 10
FIGURE 2- 9 DAUGHTER BOARD JUMPERS SETTING T1..................................................................................... 11
FIGURE 2- 10 INSTALLATION DIAGRAM (SINGLE).................................................................................................. 12
FIGURE 2- 11 INSTALLATION DIAGRAM (DOUBLE)................................................................................................. 12
FIGURE 2- 12 CHASSIS GROUNDING ................................................................................................................... 13
FIGURE 3- 1 MANAGEMENT PORT ....................................................................................................................... 27
FIGURE 3- 2 ETHERNET PORT ............................................................................................................................ 27
FIGURE 4- 1 LOOPBACK BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................................................ 28
FIGURE 4- 2 FAR END DIAGRAM ......................................................................................................................... 29
FIGURE 5- 1 VT-100 CONTROLLER MENU TREE OVERVIEW ................................................................................. 30
FIGURE 5- 2 VT-100 MENU TREE DISPLAY SECTION ...................................................................................... 31
FIGURE 5- 3 E1 VT-100 MENU TREE OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 31
FIGURE 5- 4 T1 VT-100 MENU TREE OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 32
FIGURE 5- 5 DTE VT-100 MENU TREE OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 32
FIGURE 5- 6 SNMP MANAGEMENT DIAGRAM ....................................................................................................... 37
FIGURE 5- 7 INBAND MANAGEMENT DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................... 39
FIGURE 5- 8 JITTER BUFFER DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................ 51
FIGURE 6- 1 FRONT PANELS ............................................................................................................................. 127
FIGURE 6- 2 LCD MENU TREE .......................................................................................................................... 128
FIGURE 6- 3 E1 LCD MENU TREE .................................................................................................................... 129
FIGURE 6- 4 T1 LCD MENU TREE..................................................................................................................... 130
FIGURE 6- 5 DTE LCD MENU TREE.................................................................................................................. 131

vi

FIGURE 7- 1 CLOCK SOURCE .......................................................................................................................... 208


FIGURE 7- 2 APPLICATION DIAGRAM OF CLOCK SOURCE..................................................................................... 209
FIGURE 7- 3 W IRELESS APPLICATION DIAGRAM OF CLOCK SOURCE .................................................................... 210
FIGURE 8- 4 TDMOETHERNET ENCAPSULATION IN AN ETHERNET PACKET.......................................................... 212
FIGURE 8- 5 UDP/IP HEADER .......................................................................................................................... 214
FIGURE 8- 6 AAL1 PROCESSING ...................................................................................................................... 217
FIGURE 8- 7 AAL1 PROCESSING FOR STRUCTURED WITHOUT CAS BUNDLES ..................................................... 219
FIGURE 8- 8 SATOP UNSTRUCTURED (=UNFRAMED) ETHERNET PACKET ........................................................... 220
FIGURE 8- 9 ETHERNET PACKET OF CESOPSN STRUCTURED WITHOUT CAS (E1, BUNDLE WITH TIMESLOTS 4 AND 25)
.............................................................................................................................................................. 221
FIGURE 8- 10 CESOPSN STRUCTURED WITH CAS (E1, BUNDLE WITH TIMESLOTS 2, 4 AND 25-SINGLE PACKET) 221
FIGURE 8- 11 CESOPSN STRUCTURED WITH CAS (T1-ESF, BUNDLE WITH TIMESLOTS 2, 4 - SINGLE PACKET).. 222
FIGURE 8- 12 CESOPSN STRUCTURED WITH CAS (T1-SF, BUNDLE WITH TIMESLOTS 1, 4 AND 24 - SINGLE PACKET)
.............................................................................................................................................................. 222
FIGURE 8- 13 CESOPSN STRUCTURED WITH CAS (E1, BUNDLE WITH TIMESLOTS 2, 4 AND 25, WITH
FRAGMENTATION) ................................................................................................................................... 223

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 2- 1 JUMPER SETTING FOR MAIN BOARD .................................................................................................... 7
TABLE 2- 2 JUMPER SETTING FOR DAUGHTER BOARD ........................................................................................... 9
TABLE 2- 3 DB9S CONSOLE PORT PIN ASSIGNMENT ........................................................................................... 13
TABLE 2- 4 SNMP PORT .................................................................................................................................... 13
TABLE 2- 5 ALARM RELAY CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................. 14
TABLE 2- 6 POWER CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................................ 14
TABLE 2- 7 T1/ E1/ RJ48C LINE CONNECTOR..................................................................................................... 14
TABLE 2- 8 RJ-45 FOR ETHERNET PORT ............................................................................................................. 14
TABLE 2- 9 V.35/DB25 DTE PORT PIN DEFINITION ............................................................................................. 15
TABLE 2- 10 EIA530/DB25 DTE PORT PIN DEFINITION ...................................................................................... 16
TABLE 2- 11 X.21/DB15 DTE PORT PIN DEFINITION ........................................................................................... 16
TABLE 2- 12 RS449/DB37 DTE PORT PIN DEFINITION ....................................................................................... 17
TABLE 2- 13 RS422 DTE PORT PIN DEFINITION ................................................................................................. 18
TABLE 2- 14 DEFAULT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION............................................................................................. 19
TABLE 3- 1 CONSOLE PORT SETTING .................................................................................................................. 24
TABLE 3- 2 ALARM DEFAULT - FOR SYSTEM AND LINE .......................................................................................... 24
TABLE 3- 3 PERFORMANCE PARAMETER LIST - LINE ........................................................................................... 25
TABLE 3- 4 PERFORMANCE REPORT OPTIONS ................................................................................................... 26
TABLE 3- 5 LED INDICATION FOR MAIN UNIT ....................................................................................................... 26
TABLE 5- 1 UDP NUMBER FOR FW V1.XX.XX AND FW V2.XX.XX .......................................................................... 52
TABLE 5- 2 MAXIMUM BUNDLE ALLOCATION TABLE .............................................................................................. 53
TABLE 7- 1 EXAMPLE 1: UNIQUE CLOCK SOURCE (FROM IP6700-1 LINE CLOCK OF PORT A) ................................. 209
TABLE 7- 2 EXAMPLE 2: INDEPENDENT CLOCK SOURCE ...................................................................................... 209
TABLE 8- 3 ETHERNET PACKET STRUCTURE...................................................................................................... 212
TABLE 8- 4 ETHERNET PACKET STRUCTURE (CONT.)........................................................................................ 213
TABLE 8- 5 IP HEADER STRUCTURE.................................................................................................................. 214
TABLE 8- 6 UDP HEADER STRUCTURE ............................................................................................................. 215
TABLE 8- 7 TDMOETHERNET CONTROL W ORD STRUCTURE ............................................................................ 216
TABLE 8- 8 AAL1 HEADER STRUCTURE ............................................................................................................ 218

vii

GB

ES

P
I

Bitte fhren Sie das Gert am Ende seinerLewbensdauer den zue Verfgung
stehended Rckgabeund Sammelsystemen zu.
At the end of the product's useful life, please dispose of it at appropriate collection
points provided in your country
Une fois le produit en fin devie, veuillez le dposer dans un point de recyclage
appropri.
Para preservar el medio ambiente, al final dela vida til de su producto, depositelo
en los laguares destinado aello de acuerdo con la legislacin vigente.
No final de vida til do producto, por favor coloque no ponto de recolha
apropriado.
Onde tutelare l'ambiente, non buttate l'apparecchio trai i normali rifiuti al termine
della sua vita utile, ma portatelo presso i punti do taccolta specifici per questi rifiuti
previsti dalla normativa vigente.

NL

Wij raden u aan het apparant aan het einde van zijn nuttige levensduur, niet bij
hey gewone huisafval te deponeren, maar op de dearvoor bestemde adressen.

DK

Nr produktet er udtjent, bor det brtskaffes via de s rlige indsamlingssteder i


landet.

Ved slutten av produktets levetid br det avhendes p en kommunal miljstasjon


eller leveres til en elektroforhandler.

Lmna vnligen in produkten p lmplig tervinningsstation nr den r frbrukad.

FIN

Hvit tuote kytin pttyess viemll se asianmukaiseen keryspisteeseen.

PL

Gdy produkt nie nadaje sie juz do dalszego uzytku, nalezy zostawic go w jednym
ze specjalnych punktw zajmujacych sie zbirka zuzytych producktw w
wybranych miejscach na terenie kraju.

CZ

Po skonen jeho ivotnosti odlote prosm vrobek na pislunm sbrnm mst


zzenm dle pedpis ve va zemi.

SK

Po skonen jeho ivotnosti odovzdajte prosm zariadenie na prslunom zbernom


mieste poda platnch miestnych predpisov a noriem.

SLO

Ko se izdelku iztee ivljenska doba, ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto


oziroma ga odvrzite v skladu z veljavnimi predpisi.

GR

PRC

Chapter 1 Product Description

1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Description
Loop-IP6700 TDMoEthernet is used to transport TDM traffic over IP network, in addition to Ethernet traffic. As
the core communications network migrates from TDM to IP, the Loop-IP6700 provides a flexible and cost
effective choice for the transport of legacy TDM signals.
On the tributary side, the TDM ports can be multiple E1, T1, and DTE, or single E3/DS3, each with timing
preserved. The Ethernet port can be 10/100 BaseT. On the network side, the IP interface is 10/100 BaseT,
electrical or optical.
The Loop-IP6700 has built-in AC or DC power. Management choices include console port, Ethernet port, and
SNMP port, in addition to inband management for communication with remote management centers.
For transport of TDM signals E1, T1, E3, DS3, Jitter and Wander adheres to G.823 Traffic. In the future G.823
Synchronous will be available.

1.2 Features
1U height
WAN port
One electric Ethernet (10/100 BaseT) or optical Ethernet (10/100 Base-FX)
Tributary ports
TDM interfaces
y low speed, up to 4 E1/T1
y low speed, up to 2 DTE
y high speed, 1 E3/DS3 (future option)
LAN interface: one 10/100 BaseT Ethernet
Power
Single AC or DC power
AC (100 to 240 Vac)
DC (-20 to -72 Vdc)
Inband management: through one time slot (64K bps)
VLAN support:
Packet transparency (up to 1916 bytes)
Max. 255 VLAN
Q-in-Q
User configurable CoS
User configurable ToS in outgoing IP frame
Max. 340ms Packet Delay Variation
Built-in BERT for E1/T1
Jitter & Wander
PPM: per G.823 Traffic
PPB: per G.823 Synchronous
Multi-color LED indicators
Alarm relay
Management port and interface
LCD and keypad
Console port with VT100 menu
SNMP port:
y Embedded SNMP
y Telnet
y LoopView GUI

Chapter 1 Product Description

1.3 Applications

High Speed TDM Application

Tributary ports

E3/DS3

LAN
(10/100 BaseT)

WAN port

IP6700
TDMoEthernet

SNMP

Electric Ethernet
(10/100 BaseT)
or
Optical Ethernet
(10/100 BaseT)

IP
NETWORK

IP6700
TDMoEthernet

E3/DS3

LAN
(10/100 BaseT)

SNMP

Management

Chapter 1 Product Description

IP6700 Clock Option


To set same clock
source to all remote
units

To set different clock


source to different
remote units

Remote
Remote
Remote
Remote

Master
Master

IP6700

FE
10/ 100Mbps

IP6700
E1/T1

Master
Master

IP6700

FE
10/100Mbps

IP/ MPLS
FE
10/100Mbps

FE
10/100Mbps

FE
10/100Mbps

FE
10/100Mbps

IP6700
E1/T1

IP6700

FE

IP/ MPLS 10/ 100Mbps


FE
10/100Mbps

Master Clock Source

IP6700 Extension Phone System

IP6700

Chapter 1 Product Description

IP6700 on VPN Network

Figure 1- 1 Application Diagram

Chapter 1 Product Description

1.4 Specifications
SFP Optical Module Specification
SFP Optical
Fiber Direction
Module
MHBTW
Dual uni-directional
PHB3W
Dual uni-directional
PHB5W
Dual uni-directional
PHCUW
Dual uni-directional
PHCXW
Dual uni-directional
PHB3D
Dual uni-directional
PHB5D
Dual uni-directional
PHC8D
Dual uni-directional
PHCUD
Dual uni-directional
PHCXD
Dual uni-directional

Wavelength
(nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
1550
1310
1310
1550
1550
1550

Connector

Distance (km)

LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM

2
30
50
100
120
30
50
80
100
120

Power (dBm)
11
19
30
30
35
19
30
0
30
35

NOTE: For other special optical modules, please contact your nearest Loop sales representative.
Electric Ethernet WAN Interface
Interface
10/100 BaseT
Connector
RJ45
Optical Ethernet WAN Interface
Speed
100 Base-FX
Connector
SFP 3.3V
E1 Tributary Interface
Line Rate
2.048M bps 50 ppm
Framing
ITU G.704 (CRC: on/off, CAS: on/off,
unframed)
Line Code
AMI/HDB3
Connector
BNC and RJ48C
T1 Tributary Interface
Line Rate
1.544M bps 32 ppm
Framing
D4/ ESF/ ESF&T1.403/ NONE (clear
channel)
Line Code
AMI / B8ZS
Connector
RJ48C
NOTE: E1/T1 (jumper selectable)

Input Signal
Output Signal
Jitter
Electrical

ITU G.703
ITU G.703
ITU G.823
75 ohm coax/120 ohm twisted pair

Input Signal
Output Signal
Surge Protection
Pulse Template

DS-1 from 0 dB to -26 dB w/ALBO


DSX-1, DS-1
FCC Part 68 Sub-Part D
Per AT&T TR 62411

DTE (V.35/EIA530/X.21/V.36/RS449/RS422/V.11) Tributary Interface


Data Rate
n x 56K bps (n= 1 to 31) or n x 64K bps (n= 1 to 32)
Connector
DB25S for V.35
DB25S for EIA530
DB15S for X.21 via DB25P to DB15S conversion cable
DB37S for V.36/RS449 via DB25P to DB37S conversion cable
DB25S for RS422/V.11
E3 Tributary Interface
Data Rate
34.368M bps 4.6 ppm
Line Code
HDB3
Connector
BNC connector
Impedance
75 ohm coax

Framing
Output Mask
Total Ports
Jitter

Unframed
ETS 300 689 Sec.4.2.1.2 ITU G.703
1
ITU G.824

DS3 Tributary Interface


Data Rate
44.736M bps 4.6 ppm
Line Code
B3ZS
Connector
BNC connector
Impedance
75 ohm coax
NOTE: E3/DS3 (software selectable)

Framing
Output Mask
Total Ports
Jitter

Unframed
Bellcore GR-499-core
1
ITU G.824

Chapter 1 Product Description


Ethernet Switch
VLAN packet transparency (up to 1916 bytes)
Max. 255 VLAN
Supports Q-in-Q
User configurable CoS
User configurable ToS in outgoing IP frame
LAN Tributary Interface
Speed
10/100 BaseT
Connector
RJ45
Packet Delay Variation
For E1:
up to 256 ms
For Unframed T1:
up to 340 ms
For E3:
up to 60 ms
Clock Source
Primary Clock
Secondary Clock

For Framed T1:


For Framed T1 with CAS:
For DS3:

up to 256 ms
up to 192 ms
up to 45 ms

Internal, tributary port (A, B, C or D), WAN port, external (for low speed tributary port E1/T1/DTE only,
manufacture option)
Internal, tributary port (A, B, C or D), WAN port, external (for low speed tributary port E1/T1/DTE only,
manufacture option)

External Clock
Input Signal
Connector

E1 (2.048M bps), 2M bps, 120 ohm


BNC

Alarm Relay
Alarm Relay
Connector

Fuse alarm, performance alarm


3 pin terminal block

Network Management
Console Port
Electrical
RS232 interface
Protocol
Menu driven VT-100 terminal
Connector
DB9, female, DCE

SNMP Port
Protocol
Connector

Telnet (VT100) and Embedded SNMP


RJ45 at front panel

Inband Management
Through any one time slot (64K bps) for low speed ports (E1/T1) with frame mode only
HDLC management protocol
Performance monitors (T1, E1)
Performance Store
The last 24 hours performance in 15-minute intervals
Monitor Registers
Line, user and remote site
Performance Reports Date &Time, Error second, Unavailable second, Bursty error second, severe error second, controlled slip
second, and loss of frame count
Alarm History
Date & time, alarm type(i.e. master clock loss, RAI, AIS, LOS, BPV, ES, CSS)
Threshold
Second
Diagnostics test (T1, E1)
Loopback
Line loopback, payload loopback and local loopback
Remote Loopback
Payload loopback
Front Panel
LCD and Keypad
LEDs
Power
Single AC power or DC power.
AC: 100 to 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
DC: -20 to -72 Vdc
Power Consumption: 10W Max

Chapter 1 Product Description


Physical and Environmental
212.6 x 44 x 197 mm. (W x H x D)
Dimensions
Temperature
0 -50C
Humidity
0-95% RH (NON-CONDENSING)
Mounting
Desk-top stackable, wall mount
Certification
EMC
Safety

EN55022 Class A, EN50024, EN300 386, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A


IEC60950-1(CB), EN60950-1(CE)

Standard Compliance
ITU
G.703, G.704, G.823, G.824, G.826, V.11
IETF
TDMoIP, SAToP, CESoPSN, 802.1p/Q

Chapter 2 Installation

2 INSTALLATION
2.1 Site Selection
The following list indicates a site selection guideline. Users need to follow this guideline to select a proper
installation site.
Location of the Loop-IP6700 unit should be part of the central office equipment layout design. Considerations
should be given to entrance cable routing.
The installation site should provide proper room for adequate ventilation and cable routing. Reserve at least
0.5 m at the rear of the unit for human access, cables, and air flow.
The site should provide a stable environment. The operating area should be clean and free from extremes of
temperature, humidity, shock, and vibration.
Relative humidity should stay between 0 and 95%.

Chapter 2 Installation

2.2 Mechanical Installation


Loop-IP6700 is a desk top unit, which offers installation for power supply: on board fixed. The front panel is
shown in Figure 2-1 & Figure 2-2, and the rear panel is shown in Figure 2-3.

Loop - IP
CONSOLE

TM

TDMoEthernet
ESC
D
C

10/100

LINK/ACT

LAN
WAN
LINK / ACT

B
ENTER

SNMP

POWER

ALM
10

/ 100

PORT

Figure 2- 1 Front Panel View (with LCD)

CONSOLE

LINK/ACT

10/100

Loop-IP

LAN WAN

TM

LINK/ACT

ACO

TDMoEthernet

A
POWER

SNMP/ LAN2

ALM
10/100

Figure 2- 2 Front Panel View (without LCD)

Chapter 2 Installation

There are 4 models of Loop IP6700 available. The models are shown in the following figures.
Rear Panel
PORT D-V.35

ACLINE, 100-240VAC
50/60 HZ,0.3A MAX.

PORT C

RELAY
PORT B

ACLINE, 100-240VAC
50/60 HZ,0.3A MAX.

RX-IN

PORT A

NC COM NO

PORT A/B/C

WAN

TX-OUT

RX-IN

TX-OUT

EXT.CLK

LAN

E1 or T1, PORT D - V.35


PORT D-V.35

PORT D-V.35

WAN

EXT.CLK

PORT B

PORT A/B
ACLINE, 100-240VAC
50/60 HZ,0.3A MAX.

E1 or T1, PORT C/D - V.35

RX-IN

TX-OUT

RELAY

PORT B

NC COM NO

WAN

PORT C

TX-OUT

PORT D

EXT.CLK

LAN

PORT A

RX-IN

EXT.CLK

RX-IN

TX-OUT

RELAY

PORT A

PORT A/B/C/D

LAN

E1 or T1

ACLINE, 100-240VAC
50/60 HZ,0.3A MAX.

WAN

PORT A

RX-IN

TX-OUT

RELAY

LAN

NC COM NO

PORT A only (DS3/E3)

POWER (DC)

or
AC LINE, 100-240VAC,
50/60Hz, 0.4A MAX.

-V +V

DC power supply

AC power supply

Figure 2- 3 Rear Panel Views

Chapter 2 Installation

Table 2- 1 Jumper Setting for Main Board


PORT

PART

JP6, JP8,
JP10, JP11

E1 120

PIN (2,3) ON OFF

E1 75

JP5

B
JP22

JP14, JP16,
JP18, JP19

JP13

PIN (1,2) OFF PIN (2,3) ON OFF

PIN (5,6) OFF

PIN (3,4) OFF

PIN (7,8) OFF

PIN (1,2) ON PIN (2,3) ON PIN (1,2) OFF PIN (1,2) ON PIN (2,3) ON

PIN (5,6) OFF

PIN(3,4) ON
T1 100

No card

JP22

PIN (2,3) ON PIN (1,2) ON PIN (1,2) ON

PIN (7,8) ON
PIN (2,3) ON PIN (1,2) ON

PIN (5,6) ON

PIN (3,4) OFF

PIN (7,8) OFF

PIN (1,2) ON

PIN (5,6) ON

PIN (3,4) ON

PIN (7,8) OFF

Chapter 2 Installation

1
3
5
7

Main Board

2
4
6
8

JP22

RJ (120 ohm) E1

JP13
1
2
3

1
2
3

JP5

JP14 JP16
1
2
3

ON

1
2
3

JP18 JP19
1
2
3

JP6 JP8

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
3

JP10 JP11
1
2
3

1
2
3

OFF

Figure 2- 4 Main Board Jumpers Setting-E1, RJ (120 ohm)

Chapter 2 Installation

1
3
5
7

Main Board

2
4
6
8

JP22

BNC (75 ohm) E1

JP13
1
2
3

1
2
3

JP5

JP14 JP16
1
2
3

ON

1
2
3

JP18 JP19
1
2
3

JP6 JP8

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
3

JP10 JP11
1
2
3

1
2
3

OFF

Figure 2- 5 Main Board Jumpers Setting-E1, BNC (75 ohm)

Chapter 2 Installation

1
3
5
7

Main Board

2
4
6
8

JP22

T1 (100 ohm)

JP13
1
2
3

1
2
3

JP5

JP14 JP16
1
2
3

ON

1
2
3

JP18 JP19
1
2
3

JP6 JP8

1
2
3

1
2
3

JP10 JP11

1
2
3

OFF

Figure 2- 6 Main Board Jumpers Setting - T1

1
2
3

1
2
3

Chapter 2 Installation

Table 2- 2 Jumper Setting for Daughter Board


PORT C OR D

T1/E1 Daughter Card

PART

JP5, JP7, JP9, JP10 JP1

JP2

JP12

JP4

E1 120

PIN (2,3) ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

E1 75

PIN (1,2) ON

OFF

ON

ON

PIN (2,3) ON

T1 100

PIN (2,3) ON

ON

OFF

ON

PIN (1,2) ON

JP1

JP2

JP 12

3 2 1
JP 4

Daughter Board
RJ (120 ohm) E1

1 2 3

1 2 3

JP7

JP10
1 2 3

1 2 3
JP9

JP5

ON

OFF

Figure 2- 7 Daughter Board Jumpers Setting - E1, RJ (120 ohm)

Chapter 2 Installation

JP1

JP2

JP 12

3 2 1
JP 4

Daughter Board
BNC (75 ohm) E1

1 2 3

1 2 3

JP7

JP10
1 2 3

1 2 3
JP9

JP5

ON

OFF

Figure 2- 8 Daughter Board Jumpers Setting - E1, BNC (75 ohm)

10

Chapter 2 Installation

JP1

JP2

JP 12

3 2 1
JP 4

Daughter Board
T1(100 ohm)

1 2 3

1 2 3

JP7

JP10
1 2 3

1 2 3
JP9

JP5

ON

OFF

Figure 2- 9 Daughter Board Jumpers Setting T1

11

Chapter 2 Installation

C O N S O LE

D
L AN WAN

Loop -IP T M
10 /10 0

L INK/ AC T

LI NK /ACT

ACO

TDM oIP

SNM P/ LAN2

P OWER

ALM
10 /1 00

Figure 2- 10 Installation Diagram (Single)

C ON S OL E
C O N SO LE

Loop -IP

D
L AN W AN

TM

1 0 /10 0

LAN WAN

TM

LINK /A CT

ACO

TD M oIP

LINK /A CT

L INK/ACT

10 /10 0

Loop -IP

L INK/ ACT

ACO

TDMoIP

SNMP/ LAN2

S NMP/ LA N2

PO W ER

ALM

P OWER

A LM
10 / 100

1 0/1 00

Figure 2- 11 Installation Diagram (Double)

12

Chapter 2 Installation

Chassis Grounding
The chassis is grounded when rack mounted. However, for stand alone units or extra grounding protection
for rack mounted units, a dedicated chassis ground screw and lock washer is provided. The chassis ground
screw is located on the right side of rear panel.
When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw, please follow these instructions:
y Use copper grounding conductors of 18 AWG
y Conductors should not be of dissimilar metals.
y The bare conductors should be coated with anti-oxidant before crimp connections are made.
y Unplanted connection surfaces, connectors, braided strap and bus bars must be bought to a bright finish
and coated with anti-oxidant before connections are made.
y Listed connectors and fastening hardware must be used.

WAN

RX-IN

TX-OUT

PORT C

PORT A

LAN

Figure 2- 12 Chassis Grounding


Console port can be connected via RS232 interface to a configuration device a VT100 terminal or equivalent.
Pin definition and pin connection of the console port are listed in the following table.
Table 2- 3 DB9S Console Port Pin Assignment
Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Signal

Description

Data Carrier Detect


Receive Data
Transmit Data
Unassigned
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Unassigned
Clear to send
Unassigned

To DTE
To DTE
From DTE

To DTE
To DTE

Table 2- 4 SNMP Port


Pin Number

Signal

Description

1
2
3
6
7
8

TPTX+
TPTXTPRX+
TPRXChassis GND
Chassis GND

13

TP Driver Output
TP Receive Input

Chapter 2 Installation

Table 2- 5 Alarm Relay Connector


Pin Number

Signal

1
2
3

NC
COM
NO

Description
Normal Close
Common
Normal Open

Table 2- 6 Power Connector


Pin Number

Signal

1
2
3

-V
+V

Description
-DC 48 Volts
+DC Return
Chassis Ground

Table 2- 7 T1/ E1/ RJ48C Line Connector


Pin Number
1
2
4
5
7
8

Signal

Signal Direction

Receive Ring
Receive Tip
Transmit Ring
Transmit Tip
Unassignment
Unassignment

Input to IP6700
Input to IP6700
Output from IP6700
Output from IP6700

Table 2- 8 RJ-45 for Ethernet Port


Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Signal
Transmit Data +
Transmit Data Receive Data +
No Connection
No Connection
Receive Data No Connection
No Connection

Signal Direction
Output from IP6700
Output from IP6700
Input to IP6700

Input to IP6700

14

Chapter 2 Installation

The DTE port is configured as a DCE device. There are 5 different DTE boards: V.35/DB25, EIA530/DB25,
X.21/DB15, RS449/DB37 and RS422. Pin definitions are defined in Table 2-9 to 2-13.

Table 2- 9 V.35/DB25 DTE Port Pin Definition


Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Signal
Cable Shield
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
Receive Clock Return
Unassigned
External Clock Return
Transmit Clock Return
Unassigned
Transmit Data Return
Transmit Clock
Receive Data Return
Receive Clock
Local Loopback
Unassigned
Data Terminal Ready
Remote Loopback
Unassigned
Unassigned
External Clock
Test Mode

Source
DTE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DTE
DTE

DTE
DCE

15

Chapter 2 Installation

Table 2- 10 EIA530/DB25 DTE Port Pin Definition


Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Signal
Cable Shield
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
Receive Clock Return
Data Carrier Detect Return
External Clock Return
Transmit Clock Return
Clear To Send Return
Transmit Data Return
Transmit Clock
Receive Data Return
Receive Clock
Local Loopback
Request To Send Return
Data Terminal Ready
Remote Loopback
Data Set Ready Return
Data Terminal Ready Return
External Clock
Test Mode

Source
DTE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DCE
DTE
DTE
DCE

Table 2- 11 X.21/DB15 DTE Port Pin Definition


Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Signal
Cable Shield
Transmit Data
Control
Receive Data
Indication
Signal Timing
External Clock
Signal Ground
Transmit Data Return
Control Return
Receive Data Return
Indication Return
Signal Timing Return
External Clock Return
Unassigned

Source
DTE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE

16

Chapter 2 Installation

Table 2- 12 RS449/DB37 DTE Port Pin Definition


Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal
Cable Shield
Unassigned
Unassigned
Transmit Data
Transmit Clock
Receive Data
Request To Send
Receive Clock
Clear To Send
Local Loopback
Data Set Ready
Data Terminal Ready
Data Carrier Detect
Remote Loopback
Unassigned
Unassigned
External Clock
Test Mode
Signal Ground
Unassigned
Unassigned
Transmit Data Return
Transmit Clock Return
Receive Data Return
Request To Send Return
Receive Clock Return
Clear To Send Return
Unassigned
Data Set Ready Return
Data Terminal Ready Return
Data Carrier Detect Return
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
External Clock Return
Unassigned
Unassigned

17

Source

DTE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DTE

DTE
DCE

DTE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE

DTE

Chapter 2 Installation

Table 2- 13 RS422 DTE Port Pin Definition


Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Signal
Cable Shield
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
Receive Clock Return
Data Carrier Detect Return
External Clock Return
Transmit Clock Return
Clear To Send Return
Transmit Data Return
Transmit Clock
Receive Data Return
Receive Clock
Unassigned
Request To Send Return
Data Terminal Ready
Unassigned
Data Set Ready Return
Data Terminal Ready Return
External Clock
Unassigned

18

Source
DTE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE
DTE
DCE
DTE
DTE

Chapter 2 Installation

Table 2- 14 Default Software Configuration


Configuration

E1 Line

T1 Line

Option

Default

Frame

ON, OFF

OFF

Code

HDB3, AMI

HDB3

CRC

ON, OFF

ON

RAI

ON, OFF

ON

FDL

OFF, FDL, HDLC

OFF

IDLE

0-ff

D5

Sa_Bit

Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7, Sa8, Sa4+5

Sa4

AIS

ON, OFF

OFF

CAS

ON, OFF

OFF

OOS

IDLE, BUSY_IDLE, IDLE_BUSY, BUSY

IDLE

Frame

D4, None, ESF, ESF & T1 403

None

Code

B82S, AMI

B82S

YEL

ON, OFF

ON

AIS

ON, OFF

OFF

CAS

ON, OFF

OFF

OOS

IDLE, BUSY_IDLE, IDLE_BUSY, BUSY

IDLE

Inband

ON, OFF

OFF

IDLE

O-ff

INTF

LONG HAUL, SHORT HAUL

LONG HAUL

LBO

LONG HAUL = LBO (0dB, -7.5dB, -15dB)

0-110

SHORT HAUL = LBO (1-110, 110-220,


220-330, 330-440, 440-550, 550-660)

Clock

Console
port

FDL

OFF, FDL

OFF

Master Clock

Line, Internal, External, Bundle 0

Internal

2nd Clock

Line, Internal, External, Bundle 0

Internal

nd

Current Clock

Master, 2 , Internal

Internal

Clock_Recover
_Mode

MANUAL, AUTO

Baud rate

2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400

9600

Data length

8-bits, 7-bits

8-bits

Stop bits

1-bit, 2-bits

1-bit

Parity

NONE, EVEN, ODD

NONE

SNMP

AUTO, FULL_100M, HALF_100M,


FULL_10M, HALF_10M

AUTO

WAN

AUTO, FULL_100M, HALF_100M,


FULL_10M, HALF_10M

AUTO

LAN

AUTO, FULL_100M, HALF_100M,


FULL_10M, HALF_10M

AUTO

AUTO

Ethernet
port

Speed/Dupl
ex

19

Chapter 2 Installation

Configuration

Option

IP address
Network
manageme Subnet mask
nt
Gateway IP

SNMP

Default
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0

Trap IP

0.0.0.0

Community
Name

Public

Device name

IP6700

IP6700

Note:
1. Frame
For the E1 line interface, the frame format is ITU G.704. Either 2-frame, or 16-frame structure can be
selected. E1 supports clear channel mode, called E1 FRAME OFF mode, which can map to E1 same mode.
2. Code
For the E1 line interface, either AMI (Alternate Mark Inverting) or HDB3 (high density bipolar of length 3) line
code format can be chosen, be sure this setting matches that of the network.
3. CRC
For the E1 line interface, the frame format is ITU G.704. Either 2-frame, or 16-frame structure can be selected.
Only the 16-frame provides CRC (Cycle Redundancy Check).
For two frame mode, set CRC to OFF. For multiframe mode, set CRC to ON.
E1 can be used in two frames or multiframe mode. If CRC is OFF, 2 frame format results. If CRC is ON, 16
frame format results. For E1, the cyclic redundancy check function can be turned ON or OFF. Unlike bipolar
violation, which can monitor only one span, CRC allows error monitoring through multiple spans of DS0 lines.
For E1, if CAS is ON, a 16-frame structure is used, which is independent of the 16-frame structure for CRC. A
proprietary facility data link is implemented in both modes to facilitate remote system control and performance
and statistics monitoring.
4. RAI
Remote Alarm Indication, transmits a return signal back out to indicate loss of signal and loss of frame sync at
the receiving side if the port. This action can be turned ON or OFF.
5. AIS
AIS, alarm indication signal, notify the far end that a loopback and diagnostic test are in progression. Thus
customer signals are blocked. The AIS can be sent two ways. In the framed mode, all time slots will have all
ones sent but the framing pattern will be preserved. In the unframed mode, all ones are sent for all time slots.
6. CAS
CAS (Channel-Associated Signaling) is a method for sending signaling information where time slot 16 of the
E1 format is shared for each of 30 other time slots within the same E1. Off designation is for CAS disabled. For
E1, when disabled, the 256N multiframe is used when time slot 16 is available to the user. The maximum
number of time slots available for payload is 31. ON designation is for CAS enabled. When enabled, the 256S
multiframe is used when time slot 16 is reserved for the transmission for end-to-end signaling using CAS. The
maximum number of time slots available for payload is then 30.

20

Chapter 3 Operation

7. CGA
Carrier Group Alarm, CGA, is necessary for proper operation of the switched network in the face of possible
faults of the transport system. In the normal option, when a carrier facility fails, the switching system must be
notified so that it should cease to use that facility until repair is made. In the transparent option, the signaling
bits are left alone in fault conditions.
8. OOS
Out Of Service Signaling, for normal CGA option, when failure of the facility occurs, if there are calls in
progress, the billing system should be notified to stop charging the customer at the time of facility failure.
9. FDL
FDL for E1 is used to achieve remote system Loopback.
10. IDLE
Any DS0 time slot, which is not assigned is an idle time slot. An idle code is transmitted on idle DS0 time slots.
The idle time slot may be programmed to any bit pattern from 0x00 to 0Xff.
11. INTF
E1 interface only display 120 Ohm twisted pair / 75 Ohm BNC.

2.3 TDMoEthernet Theory of Operation


Over the past few years, packet-switched network (PSN) coverage has become ubiquitous, stimulating a
desire for convergence of all communications services over a unified infrastructure. This has brought into
prominence the concept of a pseudowire (PW). A pseudowire emulates a native service (e.g., ATM,
frame-relay, Ethernet or TDM) but utilizes transport over a PSN.
TDM over Ethernet, or TDMoEthernet, is a TDM PW technology that makes it possible to provision E1, T1, E3,
T3, STS-1, and serial data services across IP, MPLS or layer 2 Ethernet networks. The services are provided
in a manner transparent to all protocols and signaling. TDMoEthernet enables service providers to migrate to
next generation networks while continuing to provide all their revenue-generating legacy voice and data
services, and without fork-lift upgrades of end-user equipment. TDMoEthernet also benefits data carriers by
enabling them to offer lucrative leased-line and voice services on their packet-switched infrastructures. It
enables enterprises to run voice and video over the same IP/Ethernet-based network that is currently used to
run only LAN traffic, thereby minimizing network maintenance and operating costs.
Unlike other traffic types that can be carried over pseudowires, TDM is a real-time bit stream, leading to
TDMoEthernet having unique characteristics. In addition, conventional TDM networks have numerous special
features, in particular those required in order to carry voice-grade telephony channels. These features imply
signaling systems that support a wide range of telephony features, a rich standardization literature, and
well-developed OAM mechanisms. All of these factors must be taken into account when emulating TDM over
PSNs.
One critical issue in implementing TDM PWs is clock recovery. In native TDM networks the physical layer
carries highly accurate timing information along with the TDM data, but when emulating TDM over PSNs this
synchronization is absent. TDM timing standards can be exacting, and conformance with these requires
innovative mechanisms to adaptively reproduce the TDM timing. TDMoEthernet ensures that recovered clock
jitter and wander levels conform to ITU-T G.823/824, even for networks that introduce high packet delay
variation and packet loss.

21

Chapter 3 Operation
TDMoEthernet complements VoIP in those cases where VoIP is not applicable, and in those cases where VoIP
price/performance is not optimal. Most importantly, TDMoEthernet can provide higher voice quality with much
lower latency than VoIP. And unlike VoIP, TDMoEthernet can support all applications that run over E1/T1
circuits, not just voice. TDMoEthernet can provide traditional leased-line services over IP, and is transparent to
protocols and signaling. Because TDMoEthernet provides an evolutionary (as opposed to revolutionary
approach), investment protection is maximized.

2.3.1 Clock Recovery


Sophisticated TDM clock recovery mechanisms, one for each E1/T1 interface, allow end-to-end TDM clock
synchronization, despite packet delay variation of IP/MPLS/Ethernet network.
IP6700 supports the following clock recovery modes:
Adaptive clock recovery
External clock
Loopback clock
The clock recovery mechanisms provide both fast frequency acquisition and highly accurate phase tracking:
Jitter and wander of the recovered clock are maintained at levels that conform to G.823/G.824 traffic or
synchronization interfaces. For adaptive clock recovery, the recovered clock performance depends on packet
network characteristics.
Short-term frequency accuracy (1 second) is better than 16 ppb (using PPB reference), or 100 ppb (using
PPM reference)
Capture range is 90 ppm
Internal synthesizer resolution of 0.5 ppb
High resilience to the packet loss and mis-ordering, up to 5% of packet loss/misordering without degradation
of clock recovery performance
Robust to sudden significant constant delay changes
Automatic transition to hold-over is performed upon link-break events

2.3.2 Bundles
A bundle is defined as a stream of bits that have originated from the same physical interface. They are
transmitted from a IP6700 source device to a IP6700 destination device. For example, bundles may comprise
any number of 64 Kbps timeslots originating from a single E1, T1 or an entire E3/DS3. Bundles are single
direction streams, frequently coupled with bundles in the opposite direction to enable full duplex
communications. More than one bundle can be transmitted between two IP6700 devices. For E1/T1, the chip
provides internal bundle cross-connect functionality, with DS0 resolution. You can establish a cross-connect
between different E1/T1 interfaces of IP6700 device, or within one interface of IP6700. Only one bundle can be
defined for E3/DS3.
Up to 64 bundles are supported. Each bundle in the IP6700 is transmitted using one of the following payload
type methods: AAL1, CESoPSN or SAToP. Each TDM over Ethernet bundle/connection may be assigned to
one of the payload types. For E1/T1, the chip provides internal bundle cross-connect functionality, wit DS0
resolution. You can establish a cross-connect between different E1/T1 interfaces of the IP6700 device, or
within one interface of the device.

22

Chapter 3 Operation

3 OPERATION
This chapter describes the Loop-IP6700 configuration options and operational functions; please refer to
CHAPTER 5: TERMINAL OPERATION for detailed operation.

3.1 Quick Start for Loop-IP6700


After installation, the user may want to familiarize with the equipment immediately. The following abbreviated
instructions will give the user a quick start.

3.1.1 Power On
Turn power on by attaching power cable at the rear of the unit.
Return to Default Setting.
The unit is shipped with factory default setting.

3.2 Self Test


If password is enabled, users must enter the password when logging in to gain the privilege to change system
configurations on the terminal. The default condition is password disabled. The default password is LOOP. To
change the password for the first time, enter the default password when prompted for the old password.
If the password is forgotten, the only recourse is to return to the factory setting of LOOP.

3.3 Return to Default


The unit is shipped with factory default setting.
To restore to factory setting in the future, immediately after power on, and during the display of ESC on the
LCD, press ESC key followed by pressing ENTER when RET is displayed. Unit will confirm with LOAD
DEFAULT CONFIGURATION.

3.4 Using Terminal


Management from a Telnet or Network Management System (NMS) can be effected through a LAN. Use the
DB9S console port of IP6700s rear panel to connect a VT100 terminal to configure the unit. The VT100
terminal can be a PC running a VT100 emulator software.
Upon connection, press ENTER and ESC alternately to bring the main menu into view.
Under the "Main Menu", press "O" (Log On) to see the full menu.
Under the "Main Menu", press "S" to change the system configuration.
For more detail information, see also the chapter 5 in this menu.

23

Chapter 3 Operation

3.5 System Configuration


3.5.1 Console Port
The console port allows the user either to use a local VT-100 terminal or use a remote VT-100 terminal via
modem for system configuration, diagnostics, polling status reports, etc. The console port Baud rate, data bit
length, stop bit length, and parity bit length are defaulted, as shown below.
Table 3- 1 Console Port Setting
Item
Fixed Setting
Baud
9600
Data Length
8-Bits
Stop Bit
1-Bits
Parity
NONE

3.6 Alarm
When the Loop-IP6700 reports an alarm condition, such as loss of synchronization, the ALARM will cause the
LED on the front panel to light. Each alarm can be individually enabled or disabled. The alarm types are listed
in the table as below.
Table 3- 2 Alarm Default - for System and Line
Alarm
Option
Default
RAI
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
AIS
DISABLE, ENABLE
MAJOR
LOS
DISABLE, ENABLE
MAJOR
LOF
DISABLE, ENABLE
MAJOR
Alarm
DISABLE, ENABLE
MAJOR
BPV
E1 Line
Threshold
10E- (5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
10E-5
Alarm
DISABLE, ENABLE
MAJOR
ES
Threshold
1-900
1
Alarm
DISABLE, ENABLE
MAJOR
UAS
Threshold
1-900
1
Alarm
DISABLE, ENABLE
MAJOR
CSS
E1
Threshold
1-900
1
Bundle
Status
DISABLE, ENABLE
MAJOR
Mac
Change
DISABLE, ENABLE
MAJOR
YEL
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
AIS
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
LOS
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
LOF
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
Alarm
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
BPV
T1 Line
Threshold
10E- (5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
10E-5
Alarm
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
ES
Threshold
1-900
1
Alarm
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
UAS
Threshold
1-900
1
Alarm
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
CSS
T1
Threshold
1-900
1
Bundle
Status
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR
Mac
Change
DISABLE, CRITICAL, MINOR
MAJOR

24

Chapter 3 Operation

3.7 Reports
For DS1 line receiver, Loop-IP6700 has three sets of performance registers. These are line, user, and far-end.
The line performance register tracks the DS1 line receiver performance status. The user performance register
tracks the DS1 line receiver as well, but user may clear at any time. The far-end performance register tracks
the far-end DS1 receiver status. The performance parameters are listed in the following tables.
Each performance parameter has ninety six sets of registers to record 24 hours history in 15 minute intervals.
Table 3- 3 Performance Parameter List - LINE
Performance
Parameter

BPV
ES
UAS

Description
Bipolar Violation
Error Second
Unavailable Second

Definition
2-Frame/Multiframe
Bipolar Error Count
BPV1, OOF1, or CS1.
10 consecutive SES

25

Definition
16-Frame/Multiframe
Bipolar Error Count
CRC 1, OOF 1, or CS 1.
10 consecutive SES

Chapter 3 Operation

Below lists the types of reports available, performance parameters provided by each report, and the reset
commands for each report.
Table 3- 4 Performance Report Options
Report Type

Category

[Menu Command]

Report
ES

BES

SES

UAS

AS

EFS

USER [Network]

Menu Option [1]

LINE [Network]

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

24-Hour Terminal

USER [Network]

LINE [Network]

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

N/C

1-Hour Terminal
Reports

Reports
Menu Option [2]

Y = Report available and can be cleared by front panel RESET or admin terminal command Y.
X = Report available and can be cleared by front panel RESET or admin terminal command X.
N/C = No clear. Report available, but counts cannot be cleared by the user.
= Report not available.

3.8 LED
The front panel of the Loop-IP6700 has mulit-color LEDs for operation and error indications. The indication is
either off, steady on, or flickering. The following table lists each LED and its color and the meaning it
represents. Note that when powering up and self test is in progress, the unit front panel LEDs are also used to
indicate fault conditions.

Table 3- 5 LED Indication for Main Unit


LED

Color
Off
Green
Red

POWER

Green
LINK/ACT
SNMP/WAN/
LAN
10/100

E1/T1 V.35
(A, B, C, D)

Flashing
Green

Indication
Power off, self-test failure
Normal operation
Alarm occurs
Link.
A valid network connection on the RJ-45 SNMP port.
Activity.
Data is being transmitted or received through the RJ-45 SNMP
port.

Off

10Mbps

Green

100Mbps

Green

Normal (Line in Sync)

Flashing
Green

Testing

Red

Loss of Frame (LOF) or Loss of Signal (LOS)

Flashing Red Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

26

Chapter 3 Operation

3.9 Management Port (SNMP Port)


As two IP6700s are connected: one is set as local unit and the other is set as remote unit. See also the
following diagram.

WAN

IP 6700
Local

SNMP
port

IP 6700
Remote

PC 1

Figure 3- 1 Management Port


Note: The management PC can initiate and send a ping signal to either the SNMP Port or the WAN port
of the IP6700. The IP6700, however, cannot initiate and send a ping signal to the management PC.

3.10

User Data Port (Ethernet)

IP6700's User Data Port is used to transmit or receive data only no matter IP6700 is set as Ethernet.

4 E1/T 1
E1/T1 ,
Voice, Video
and TDM
data

IP 6700

IP 6700

E1/T1 ,
Voice, Video
and TDM
data

LA
N

LA

Ethernet Traffic

4 E1/T 1

WAN

Ethernet Traffic

Figure 3- 2 Ethernet Port

27

Chapter 4 Maintenance

4 MAINTENANCE
4.1 Self-Test
When the Loop-IP6700 is powered up, a complete self-test routine is run to check all I/O ports, read/write
memory, and data paths to validate system integrity. During system self test, "TESTING" message and testing
code are shown on the VT100 terminal screen. If any error is found, a testing code is shown on the VT100
terminal display. Various system diagnostic methodology can be found in the following paragraphs.

4.2 Near End Loopback


The near end loopbacks such as digital local loopback, and line loopback are activated by the Loop-IP6700.
The loopbacks are at the near end facility. The following paragraph describes each loopback in detail.
4.2.1 E1/T1 Line Loopback
Line loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The incoming optical line signal is loopback to the outgoing optical
signal before the optical mapper. This loopback is used to isolate the local equipment from a troubled optical
transmission line. Line loopback test can be activated from the terminal.
4.2.2 E1/T1 Payload Loopback
Payload loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The incoming signal is loopback to the outgoing line signal after
the optical mapper. This loopback is used to isolate the TSI from the troubled transmission line. Payload
loopback test can be activated from the front panel and terminal.

LIU

Mux

PLB (Payload Loopback)

LLB (Line Local Loopback)

Figure 4- 1 Loopback Block Diagram

28

1
2
3
4

Chapter 4 Maintenance

4.3 Far End Loopback


Far-end loopbacks (remote line loopback, remote payload loopback, remote channel loopback, U-PORT
loopback, and HDSL loopback) can be activated by the local IP6700 to cause a remote loopback commands to
the far-end facility. Inband code words are supported by FDL (facility data link) to initiate the loopback in the
case of the DS1 line, and either M channel in the case of the U-interface line. When using FDL messages, FDL
must be turned ON. All remote loopback can be activated from the terminal.
If the remote facility responds to a remote loopback activate command, a LOOPED message appears in the
lower left corner of the display. If the remote facility responds to a remote loopback deactivate command, a NO
LOOP message appears. If the remote activation/deactivation fails, an error message appears.
Either proprietary remote loopback commands can be used, or the industry standard V.54 loopback codes can
be used.
It is best to use remote loopbacks in conjunction with PRBS diagnostics testing to measure the DS1 network
line or U line integrity. The procedure is as follows:
1. Send a remote loopback command to cause the remote facility to perform a loopback.
2. Activate the PRBS or QRSS diagnostics test.
3. The far end loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-2.

E1

E1

IP6700

Line local loopback

Figure 4- 2 Far End Diagram

29

Payload loopback

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5 TERMINAL OPERATION
The Loop-IP6700 provides comprehensive report and configuration capability through the console port. By
using single-character commands and arrow keys, the Loop- IP6700 can be configured and monitored through
the use of a VT-100 terminal. The single-character commands are not case sensitive, except for when using a
password. On each screen, the available commands and the configurable fields are highlighted.
When a VT-100 terminal is connected to the CONSOLE port of the Loop- IP6700, a main menu is displayed on
the VT-100 monitor. The main menu consists of four groups of commands, DISPLAY, LOG, SETUP, and
MISC. All commands are detailed in the VT-100 Controller Menu Tree illustrations below.
This chapter provides detailed setup instructions. After connecting your VT-100 monitor to the Loop device,
your first setup steps should be as follows:
1. Log on and set up your password (see Section 5.1 & 5.1.1.3 Logon and Password Setup)

Figure 5- 1 VT-100 Controller Menu Tree Overview

30

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Figure 5- 2 VT-100 Menu Tree DISPLAY Section

Figure 5- 3 E1 VT-100 Menu Tree Overview

31

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Figure 5- 4 T1 VT-100 Menu Tree Overview

Figure 5- 5 DTE VT-100 Menu Tree Overview

32

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1 Logon
When the Loop-IP6700 is powered on, the screen will show as below. If the terminal screen is illegible, press
the Enter and Esc key alternatively to bring up the main menu. This is particularly needed if the terminal is
connected to the controller while the power is already applied. If the main menu still fails to appear, check to
see that the terminal is configured as 9600, 8, n, 1, and that a proper null modem or a null modem cable is
used.
Press O to logon, the screen is shown below.
If the user does password setup, a new prompt will ask for your password. User should enter to system setup
to do password setup (O > Logon S > System Setup C > Password Setup). Key it in (capital letters only)
and then press the Enter key.

L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]

1 4: 00 : 0 8 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

For an ADMIN user, a full Controller Menu will appear after keying in the password (for detail of password,
please refer to 5.1.1.3 for detail information). To logoff press F.
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Note:
1. OSC Ver: There are two kinds of hardware version - TCXO (TCXO =1 PPm) & OCXO (OCXO= 10 PPb).

33

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


5.1.1 System Setup
The full menu path for system setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press "S" from the Main Menu to view the system setup. The screen will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00

= = = S ys t em S e t up == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

S y st e m
I n ba n d S ys te m Se t up
P a ss w or d
P o rt Sp e ed S e t up

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

34

0 0: 0 0 :2 9 #0 1 /0 1 /U U 93

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


5.1.1.1 System
The full menu path for system setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Setup
A > System
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

L O O P I P6 7 00

= = = S ys t em S e t up == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

S y st e m
I n ba n d S ys te m Se t up
P a ss w or d
P o rt Sp e ed S e t up

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

35

0 0: 0 0 :2 9 #0 1 /0 1 /U U 93

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Press "A" from the "System Setup" to display the current status for system and console port. Refer to the table
below to see the differences when SNMP uses different ports.
L O O P I P6 7 00
== = S y st e m S et u p (S Y S TE M ) = ==
1 1: 19 : 4 7 0 7/ 2 3/ 2 00 7
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: hh :m m : ss mm / dd / yy y y, BA CK S P AC E t o e d it
T i m e/ D at e
:1 1 :1 9: 4 8 0 7 /2 3 /2 0 07 E t he rn e t P o rt : EN A BL E L an P o r t: Da t a_ o nl y
I P Ad d r. : 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 .0 0 0 S u bn e t M as k :0 0 0. 00 0 . 00 0 .0 0 0 G at e wa y I P: 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0
C o m mu n it y :( G et ) pu b li c
C om m un i ty (S e t )p u bl i c
W an P o r t: WA N _o n ly
T r a p I P A dd r es s 1: 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 C o mm u ni ty 1 : pu b li c
T r a p I P A dd r es s 2: 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 C o mm u ni ty 2 : pu b li c
T r a p I P A dd r es s 3: 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 C o mm u ni ty 3 : pu b li c
T r a p I P A dd r es s 4: 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 C o mm u ni ty 4 : pu b li c
T r a p I P A dd r es s 5: 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 C o mm u ni ty 5 : pu b li c
D e v ic e N a me
:L O OP I P 6 70 0
S y s te m L o ca t io n :8 F , No . 8 , H SI N A N N R OA D
S C IE NC E - BA S ED IN D US T RI A L PA R K
H S IN CH U , 3 0 07 7 T A IW A N
S y s te m C o nt a ct :N a me : F A E
T e l: + 88 6 -3 - 57 87 6 9 6
E -m ai l : FA E @l o op . co m .t w

Fa x :+ 8 86 - 3- 5 78 76 9 5

A c t iv e b u nd l e T im e r (s ) : 0 00 0 00 9 0
L oo p b ac k T i me r ( s ) : 0 00 0 0 06 0
L A N R a te Se t up : 0 10 0 x 3 2K
CA S I d le Co de : 0 1
Re m ot e l o ss :c o nt i nu e
P o w er : AC
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
Da ta L en g th :8 - Bi t s
S to p Bi t : 1 -B i t
P a ri ty : NO N E
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

Note:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

IP address: device IP address


Gateway IP: companys DNS server value
Trap IP address: the user can setup no more than 5 Trap IP addresses. In any situation, the user
cannot connect any two ports in one LAN. When SNMP is setup at the SNMP port, the WAN port and
the LAN port act as switches. When SNMP is setup at the WAN port, the SNMP port will shut down. No
matter what the user does in any setup, the LAN port and the WAN port act as switches.
Remote loss------ When remote loss shows continue, local side will keep sending packet to remote
side. When remote loss shows stop, local side will stop sending packet to remote side.
The SNMP management can go through different ports (SNMP, LAN, WAN), the configuration will
show as table and diagram (application 1 to application 3) below. D means Data and S means SNMP.
Application

SNMP Management

Application 1
Application 2

SNMP Port
Configuration
Through SNMP port
Enable
Through LAN port Ignored by IP6700

Application 3

Through WAN port

Ignored by IP6700

36

LAN Port
Configuration
Data_only
D+S, S-on
D+S, S-off
Data_only

WAN Port
Configuration
WAN_only
WAN_only
WAN +S

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Figure 5- 6 SNMP management diagram

37

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


5.1.1.2 Inband Management
The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Setup
B > Inband System Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

L O O P I P6 7 00

= = = S ys t em S e t up == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

S y st e m
I n ba n d S ys te m Se t up
P a ss w or d
P o rt Sp e ed S e t up

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

38

0 0: 0 0 :2 9 #0 1 /0 1 /U U 93

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Press "B" from the "System Setup" to setup Inband Management. It is to manage remote device from local
device. For example: one E1 assign one timeslot to manage other device. Please refer to Figure 6-1 for detail.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= = = I nb a nd Ma na g e me n t = ==
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
I n b an d
Port
T i m e S lo t

1 3: 1 2 :5 2 1 2 /0 6 /2 0 05

: OF F
: PO R T_ A
: 00

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

Note: 1. When Inband is on, the user needs to create a bundle (the diagram show as below).
2. Inband management can manage a pair only
3. Three ports in IP6700 cannot connect together in same switch. It will cause Ethernet Loop.
Inband = on
E1
E1
E1/V.35
E1/V.35

10/100
LAN Base T

Inband = on

10/100 BaseT

IP6700
TDMoEthernet

10/100 BaseT

WAN

IP6700
TDMoEthernet

SNMP

SNMP

Management

Figure 5- 7 Inband management Diagram

39

10/100
Base T

E1
E1
E1/V.35
E1/V.35
LAN

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.1.3 Password/Changing a Password


The full menu path for Password is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Setup
C > Password Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

L O O P I P6 7 00

= = = S ys t em S e t up == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

S y st e m
I n ba n d S ys te m Se t up
P a ss w or d
P o rt Sp e ed S e t up

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

40

0 0: 0 0 :2 9 #0 1 /0 1 /U U 93

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

without changing password: press C from system setup mean, the screen will show as below. (The default
password is LOOP in upper case letters.)
L O O P I P6 7 00
= = = P as s wo r d Se t u p = ==
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S

1 8: 02 : 2 0 0 8/ 0 7/ 2 00 7

E n ab l e P as s wo rd : Y E S
C h an g e P as s wo rd : N O

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

The full menu path for Changing a Password is as follows:


O > Logon
S > System Setup
C > Password Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
Note: Password can be alphabetic, numeric or a combination of both. Alphabetic characters can be keyed in
as upper case or lower case. Maximum password size is 11 characters
To change a password, press S from the controller Menu
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

41

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


L O O P I P6 7 00

= = = S ys t em S e t up == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

0 0: 0 0 :2 9 #0 1 /0 1 /U U 93

S y st e m
I n ba n d S ys te m Se t up
P a ss w or d
P o rt Sp e ed S e t up

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

Key in your old password and press the Enter key. (The default password is LOOP in upper case letters.)
L O O P I P6 7 00
== = P a ss w or d S e tu p = = =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt

1 4: 0 8 :4 5 1 2 /0 6 /2 0 05

E n ab l e P as s wo rd : Y E S
C h an g e P as s wo rd : Y E S

> > P l ea s e i np u t n ew p a s sw o rd ag a in to co nf i r m, th e n p re s s E NT ER .

42

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


L O O P I P6 7 00
== = P a ss w or d S e tu p = = =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt

1 4: 0 8 :4 5 1 2 /0 6 /2 0 05

E n ab l e P as s wo rd : Y E S
C h an g e P as s wo rd : Y E S
Old Password
: XXXX

> > P l ea s e i np u t n ew p a s sw o rd ag a in to co nf i r m, th e n p re s s E NT ER .

L O O P I P6 7 00
== = P a ss w or d S e tu p = = =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt
E n ab l e P as s wo rd
C h an g e P as s wo rd
Old Password
new Password

:
:
:
:

1 4: 0 8 :4 5 1 2 /0 6 /2 0 05

YES
YES
XXXX
XXXX

> > P l ea s e i np u t n ew p a s sw o rd ag a in to co nf i r m, th e n p re s s E NT ER .

43

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Confirm your password by keying it in again. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you want to save the
new password. Press Y for yes.
L O O P I P6 7 00
== = P a ss w or d S e tu p = = =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt
E n ab l e P as s wo rd
C h an g e P as s wo rd
Old Password
new Password
Confirm Password

:
:
:
:
:

1 4: 0 8 :4 5 1 2 /0 6 /2 0 05

YES
YES
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX

> > P l ea s e i np u t n ew p a s sw o rd ag a in to co nf i r m, th e n p re s s E NT ER .

Note:
1.
Write your password down and keep it in a safe place in case you forget it.
2.
Maximum password size is 11 characters. Minimum password size is 1 character. Both alphabetic
and/or numeric characters are allowed.
Press the Esc key twice to return to the Controller Menu.

5.1.1.4 Port Speed Setup


The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Setup
D > Port Speed Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

44

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


L O O P I P6 7 00

= = = S ys t em S e t up == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

0 0: 0 0 :2 9 #0 1 /0 1 /U U 93

S y st e m
I n ba n d S ys te m Se t up
P a ss w or d
P o rt Sp e ed S e t up

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

Press "D" from the "System Setup" to setup port speed.


L O O P I P6 7 00
== = S p ee d M a na ge m e nt == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S

1 6: 19 : 2 7 0 4/ 2 4/ 2 00 6

L A N : AU T O
W A N : AU T O
S N M P : AU T O

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

NOTE:
Configuration

Option

Default

LAN
WAN

full-100, half-100, full-10, half-10


full-100, half-100, full-10, half-10

AUTO
AUTO

SNMP

full-100, half-100, full-10, half-10

AUTO

45

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.2 Time Slot IP Assignment


The full menu path for Time Slot IP Assignment is as follows:
O > Logon
T > Time Slot IP Assignment
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press "T" from the Main Menu to view the Time Slot IP Assignment. The screen will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M A P S et up = ==

1 1: 33 : 3 8 1 1/ 1 4/ 2 00 6

V - > B u nd l e I P se t u p
W - > T i me Sl o t IP A ss i gn m en t

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

46

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


5.1.2.1 Bundle IP Setup
The full menu path for Bundle IP Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
T > Time Slot IP Assignment
V > Bundle IP Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press "T" from the Main Menu to view the Time Slot IP Assignment. The screen will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M A P S et up = ==

1 1: 33 : 3 8 1 1/ 1 4/ 2 00 6

V - > B u nd l e I P se t u p
W - > T i me Sl o t IP A ss i gn m en t

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

47

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Press V to get the screen of Bundle IP Setup.
L O O P I P6 7 00
== = B u nd l e I P Se t u p = ==
1 5 :5 4: 3 8 1 1 /0 3 /2 0 06
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t
S r c . I P A dd r es s : 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00
S u b ne t M a sk
: 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00
G a t wa y I P
: 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

Note:
The Src. (Source) IP Address should be IP 6700 WAN IP

5.1.2.2 Time Slot IP Setup


The full menu path for Bundle IP Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
T > Time Slot IP Assignment
W > Time Slot IP Assignment
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

48

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Press "T" from the Main Menu to view the Time Slot IP Assignment. The screen will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M A P S et up = ==

1 1: 33 : 3 8 1 1/ 1 4/ 2 00 6

V - > B u nd l e I P se t u p
W - > T i me Sl o t IP A ss i gn m en t

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

Press T to get into the screen of Time Slot IP Assignment. There are framed and unframed modes for user to
choose. Unframed mode includes two options: 1. AAL1 (refer to 8.2 for detail information). 2. SAToP (refer to
8.3 for detail information). Framed mode also includes two options: 1. AAL1 (refer to 8.2 for detail information).
2. CESoPSN (refer to 8.4 for detail information). To change the screen from framed to unframed the user
should press P to choose port A, and press enter to port menu. Then press S (refer to 6.2.10) and use Tab key
to change framed or unframed. OFF=unframed, ON =framed.
AAL1:
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
Port
: PO R T_ A
B u n dl e I D : 00
P O/ T S
A c t io n
: Ch a ng e b un d l e
= == = =
F o r ma t
: AA L 1
1
Tos
: 00 0
2
U D P N u mb e r: 00 0 01
3
T i m e S lo t : 08
4
T i m e S lo t #: 10
5
D e s t I P A dd r : 0 10 . 00 3. 0 0 9. 0 41
6
S t r at u m
:
3
7
C e l l i n B un d le : 0 5
A 8
J i t te r D e la y :
020
A 9
J i t te r S i ze :
256
A 10
V L A N:
OFF
A 11
V L A N1 ID :
0 0 00
A 12
V L A N1 pr i or i ty : 0
A 13
V L A N2 ID :
0 0 00
A 14
V L A N2 pr i or i ty : 0
A 15
C o n fi r m?
Ye s
A 16

1 8: 16 : 1 5 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

T S P O/ TS T S B ND L I D /U D P N UM D e s t I P A dd r es s
= = = == == = = = == = == = == = == = == = = = == = == = == = == =
A 17 1 7
0
1 0 1 0 .0 0 3. 0 09 . 04 1
18
19
C el l N u m J it t er D e l ay Ji t te r S i ze
20
= == = == = = = == = == == = = = = == = == = == = ==
21
5
20
2 56
22
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
31
16

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to ma i n m en u o r s a ve sy s te m s e tu p > >

49

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


SAToP:
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
Port
: PO R T_ A
B u n dl e I D : 0
P O/ T S
A c t io n
: Ad d b u nd le
= == = =
F o r ma t
: SA T oP
A 1
Tos
: 0
A 2
U D P N u mb e r: 01
A 3
T i m e S lo t : 00
A 4
T i m e S lo t #: 00
A 5
D e s t I P A dd r : 0 10 . 00 3. 0 0 9. 0 41 A 6
S t r at u m
:
3
A 7
S i z e i n B yt e s: : 3 0 0
A 8
J i t te r D e la y :
20
A 9
J i t te r S i ze :
256
A 10
V L A N:
OFF
A 11
V L A N1 ID :
0 0 00
A 12
V L A N1 pr i or i ty : 0
A 13
V L A N2 ID :
0 0 00
A 14
V L A N2 pr i or i ty : 0
A 15
C o n fi r m?
Ye s
A 16

1 8: 18 : 4 2 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

T S P O/ TS T S B ND L I D /U D P N UM D e s t I P A dd r es s
= = = == == = = = == = == = == = == = == = = = == = == = == = == =
1 A 17 1 7
0
1 0 1 0 .0 0 3. 0 09 . 04 1
2 A 18 1 8
3 A 19 1 9 C el l N u m J it t er D e l ay Ji t te r S i ze
4 A 20 2 0 = == = == = = = == = == == = = = = == = == = == = ==
5 A 21 2 1
300
20
2 56
6 A 22 2 2
7 A 23 2 3
8 A 24 2 4
9 A 25 2 5
1 0 A 26 2 6
1 1 A 27 2 7
1 2 A 28 2 8
1 3 A 29 2 9
1 4 A 30 3 0
1 5 A 31 3 1
16

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to ma i n m en u o r s a ve sy s te m s e tu p > >

CESoPSN:
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
Port
: PO R T_ A
B u n dl e I D : 00
P O/ T S
A c t io n
: Ch a ng e b un d l e
= == = =
F o r ma t
: CE S oP S N
1
Tos
: 00 0
2
U D P N u mb e r: 00 0 01
3
T i m e S lo t : 08
4
T i m e S lo t #: 10
5
D e s t I P A dd r : 0 10 . 00 3. 0 0 9. 0 41
6
S t r at u m
:
3
7
C e l l i n B un d le : 0 5
A 8
J i t te r D e la y :
020
A 9
J i t te r S i ze :
256
A 10
V L A N:
OFF
A 11
V L A N1 ID :
0 0 00
A 12
V L A N1 pr i or i ty : 0
A 13
V L A N2 ID :
0 0 00
A 14
V L A N2 pr i or i ty : 0
A 15
C o n fi r m?
Ye s
A 16

1 8: 16 : 1 5 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

T S P O/ TS T S B ND L I D /U D P N UM D e s t I P A dd r es s
= = = == == = = = == = == = == = == = == = = = == = == = == = == =
A 17 1 7
0
1 0 1 0 .0 0 3. 0 09 . 04 1
18
19
C el l N u m J it t er D e l ay Ji t te r S i ze
20
= == = == = = = == = == == = = = = == = == = == = ==
21
5
20
2 56
22
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
31
16

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to ma i n m en u o r s a ve sy s te m s e tu p > >

Note:
For SW Version 1.01.07 or over, User needs to setup Bundle from Bundle 0 because only Bundle 0 can
transfer clock.
Configuration
Bundle ID
ToS
Clock Stratum
UDP number

Option
Maximum Bundle Allocation (refer to table 5-2 for detail)
Range is from 0 to 255
Stratum 1, 2, 3, 3E and 4
There are 4 ports to have UDP number from 1 to 8063 (for
FW V1.xx.xx). If one port gets UDP number such as 100,
another port cannot use same UDP number.

50

Default
0
Stratum 3

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Configuration
Option
Cell in Bundle (1 to 30 cell) FW V1.xx.xx range from 1 to 8063

Default
5

FW V2.xx.xx range from 1 to 65535


When user connects FW V1.xx.xx.xx to FW V2.xx.xx.xx, the
UDP number will be different
(refer to table 5-1 for detail information)
How many cell will include in one bundle?
(refer to figure 8-5 for detail)
Jitter Delay (1 to 512 ms)
Jitter Size (1to 512 ms)

Note: For E3/DS3, cell in bundle value can not set as value 1
20
Total delay buffer n x 0.5 ms max.
256
Packet delay cannot n x 0.5 ms

size
This area is empty and can
be used to store incoming
bursts

delay
This area is full and there
is still data to send on the
line if incoming data is
missing due to network
delays.

Delay should be smaller than size. Also, the difference between size and delay should be larger
than the time that it takes to reconstruct a packet (otherwise an overrun may occur when the packet
arrives). Configuring the Jitter Buffer parameters correctly avoids under-run and overrun situation.
Under-run occurs when the Jitter Buffer is empty (the entering rate is lower than the exiting one). In
case of an under-run event, the chip transmits conditioning data instead of actual data towards the
TDM interface. Overrun occurs when the jitter buffer is full and there is no room for new data to
enter (the entering rate exceeds the exiting one). Under-run and overrun require special treatment
from the chip HW, depending on the bundle type.

Figure 5- 8 Jitter Buffer Diagram

51

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


IP6700(FW V1.xx.xx)
1
2

UDP number

IP6700(FW V2.xx.xx)
8193
8194

8062
8063

16254
16255

Table 5- 1 UDP number for FW V1.xx.xx and FW V2.xx.xx


After confirmed to save the configuration.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
Port
: PO R T_ A
B u n dl e I D : 00
P O/ T S
A c t io n
: De l et e b un d l e
= == = =
F o r ma t
: AA L 1
A 1
Tos
: 00 0
A 2
U D P Nu m be r : 0 0 00 1
A 3
T i m e S l ot : 0 1
A 4
T i m e S lo t #: 31
A 5
D e s t I P A dd r : 1 92 . 16 8. 1 0 0. 1 01 A 6
S t r at u m
:
3
A 7
C e l l i n B un d le : 0 5
A 8
J i t te r D e la y :
020
A 9
J i t te r S i ze :
256
A 10
V L A N:
OFF
A 11
V L A N1 ID :
0 0 00
A 12
V L A N1 pr i or i ty : 0
A 13
V L A N2 ID :
0 0 00
A 14
V L A N2 pr i or i ty : 0
A 15
C o n fi r m?
Ye s
A 16

T S P O/ TS T S
= = = == == = =
1 A 17 1 7
2 A 18 1 8
3 A 19 19
4 A 20 20
5 A 21 2 1
6 A 22 2 2
7 A 23 2 3
8 A 24 2 4
9 A 25 2 5
1 0 A 26 2 6
1 1 A 27 2 7
1 2 A 28 2 8
1 3 A 29 2 9
1 4 A 30 3 0
1 5 A 31 3 1
16

1 8: 33 : 1 4 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

B ND L I D /U D P N UM D e s t I P A dd r es s
= == = == = == = == = == = = = == = == = == = == =
0
1 1 9 2 .1 6 8. 1 00 . 10 1
C el l Nu m J it t er D el a y Ji t te r Si ze
= == = == = = == = == = == == = = == = == = == = ==
5
20
2 56

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to ma i n m en u o r s a ve sy s te m s e tu p > >

After configured it. Press Y or N to confirm it.


A r e y o u s ur e [ Y /N ] ?

NOTE:
Configuration
Port
Action

E1 Line

Bundle ID
Time Slot
Time Slot#
Payload
UDP Number
(FW V1.xx.xx)
UDP Number
(FW V2.xx.xx)
IP Address
Confirm?

Option
PORT_A, PORT_B, PORT_C, PORT_D
Add bundle, Delete bundle, Delete all, Activate all,
change bundle, stop to bundle
0-31
1-31
1-31
AAL1
1-8063

0
1
1
AAL1
1

1~65535

Range of valid IP
NO, YES

000.000.000.000
NO

52

Default
PORT_A
Add bundle

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

The Action has two options, Add bundle and Delete bundle. When user choose Add bundle option, the
bundle ID must be unique for the particular port. When user choose Delete bundle option, the particular
bundle must already been created. The UDP number need to unique for all the ports.
The IP6700 supports up to 64 bundles. The maximum number of bundles that can be allocated per port is
configured as below

Table 5- 2 Maximum Bundle Allocation Table


Max. Bundle No.
Allocation No. Port A

Port B

Port C

Port D

1.

32

Disabled

32

Disabled

2.

32

Disabled

16

16

3.

16

16

32

Disabled

4.

16

16

16

16

The highest priority of Allocation Number is descended from Allocation No. 4 to Allocation No. 1.

5.1.3 Firmware Transfer


The full menu path for Firmware Transfer is as follows:
O > Logon
W > Firmware Transfer
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

53

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Under the Main Menu, press W to enter in the screen of File Transfer as below. Press A to download
mainboard firmware, press B to upload mainboard firmware, and press "R" to copy firmware to redundant.
L O O P I P 6 70 0

= = = F i l e Tr a nsf e r == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

1 3 : 3 8: 1 3 12 / 0 6/ 2 00 5

D ow n lo a d M ai n bo ar d Fi r mw a re
D ow n lo a d B oo t S tr a p pe r
D ow n lo a d C ur r en t C o nf i gu r at i on
U pl o ad Cu r re n t Co n f ig u ra t io n f r om FL AS H

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

5.1.3.1 Download Mainboard Firmware


The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
W > Firmware Transfer
A > Download Mainboard Firmware
Notice: IP6700 (FW V1.xx.xx) cannot be upgraded to IP6700 (FW V2.xx.xx)
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

54

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


L O O P I P 6 70 0

= = = F i l e Tr a nsf e r == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

1 3 : 3 8: 1 3 12 / 0 6/ 2 00 5

D ow n lo a d M ai n bo ar d Fi r mw a re
D ow n lo a d B oo t S tr a p pe r
D ow n lo a d C ur r en t C o nf i gu r at i on
U pl o ad Cu r re n t Co n f ig u ra t io n f r om FL AS H

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

Download failure:
L O O P I P 67 0 0
= = = D o wn l oa d Fi rm w a re = ==
1 3 : 38: 3 4 12 / 06 / 20 05
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t
F i r mw a re 1 V er s io n
:
F i r mw a re 2 V er s io n
:
C u r re n t F ir m wa r e B an k:
N e x t B oo t F i rm w ar e
:
T F T P S er v er IP
:
F i r mw a re Fi l e N am e
:

E mp t y o r I nv a li d v er
E mp t y o r I nv a li d v er
1
1
0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

55

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Download success:
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Do w nl o ad Fi rm w a re == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt
F i r mw a re 1 V er s io n
:
F i r mw a re 2 V er s io n
:
C u r re n t F ir m wa r e B an k:
N e x t B oo t F i rm w ar e
:
T F T P S er v er IP
:
F i r mw a re Fi l e N am e
:

1 6: 16 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

V 2. 0 1. 0 1 0 8/ 0 6/ 2 00 7
V 2. 0 1. 0 1 0 7/ 1 9/ 2 00 7
1
1
0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00
_ __ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ __ __ _ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ __ __ _ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ _

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

5.1.3.2 Download Boot Strapper


The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
W > Firmware Transfer
B > Download Boot Strapper
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

56

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


L O O P I P 6 70 0

= = = F i l e Tr a nsf e r == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

1 3 : 3 8: 1 3 12 / 0 6/ 2 00 5

D ow n lo a d M ai n bo ar d Fi r mw a re
D ow n lo a d B oo t S tr a p pe r
D ow n lo a d C ur r en t C o nf i gu r at i on
U pl o ad Cu r re n t Co n f ig u ra t io n f r om FL AS H

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

L O O P I P 67 0 0
= = = D ow n lo a d B o otu p C od e == =
1 8: 1 1: 1 5 12 / 06 / 20 05
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t

T F T P S er v er IP
D o w nl o ad Fi l e N am e

: 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00
:

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

Note: TFTP Server IP = device IP

57

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


5.1.3.3 Download Current Configuration
The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
W > Firmware Transfer
C > Download Current Configuration
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

L O O P I P 6 70 0

= = = F i l e Tr a nsf e r == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

1 3 : 3 8: 1 3 12 / 0 6/ 2 00 5

D ow n lo a d M ai n bo ar d Fi r mw a re
D ow n lo a d B oo t S tr a p pe r
D ow n lo a d C ur r en t C o nf i gu r at i on
U pl o ad Cu r re n t Co n f ig u ra t io n f r om FL AS H

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

58

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

L O O P I P6 7 00
= = = D o wn l oa d C u rr e nt C o n fi g ur a ti o n = == 13 :3 9 : 27 12 / 06 / 20 05
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t

T F T P S er v er IP
C o n fi g F i le Na m e

: 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00
:

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

5.1.3.4 Upload Current Configuration from FLASH


The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
W > Firmware Transfer
D > Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar t o r ef r es h o r en t er a c o mm a nd = == >> > S PA C E b ar t o r ef r es h o r en t er a c o mm a nd


===>

59

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

L O O P I P 6 70 0

= = = F i l e Tr a nsf e r == =

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

1 3 : 3 8: 1 3 12 / 0 6/ 2 00 5

D ow n lo a d M ai n bo ar d Fi r mw a re
D ow n lo a d B oo t S tr a p pe r
D ow n lo a d C ur r en t C o nf i gu r at i on
U pl o ad Cu r re n t Co n f ig u ra t io n f r om FL AS H

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >

The Upload Current Configuration screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the TFTP Server IP field.
Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address and file name. Enter these in
appropriate fields of the Upload Current Configuration screen. Press the Enter key.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= = = U p lo a d C ur r en t C on f i gu r at i on == = 1 3 :45 : 4 9 1 2/ 0 6/ 2 00 5
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t

T F T P S er v er IP
C o n fi g F i le Na m e

: 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00
:

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

A prompt will ask if you really want to upload. Press Y for yes.
R e a ll y w a nt to Up l oa d ?

The current configuration will be uploaded. This procedure is now complete.

60

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.4 Store/Retrieve Configuration


The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
V > Store/Retrieve Configuration
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under the Main Menu, press V to store or retrieve the current configuration as the following screen shows.
Use TAB key to select STORE or RETRIEVE, press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

Store Configuration:
L O O P I P6 7 00

= = = St o re / Re t ri e ve Co nf i g ur a ti o n= = =

> > Se l ec t ?
* ST O RE
R ET R IE V E
> > St o re Cu r re n t C on fi g u ra t io n ? [Y / N]

61

1 3: 53 : 0 7 0 7/ 2 3/ 2 00 7

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Retrieve Configuration:
L O O P I P6 7 00

= == S to r e/ R et r ie v e Co n f ig u ra t io n == =

1 3: 5 3 :5 7 0 7 /2 3 /2 0 07

> > Se l ec t ?
ST O RE
* R ET R IE V E
> > Re t ri e ve La s t S to re d Co n fi g ur a ti o n ? [ Y/ N ]

Note: for retrieve command the user do not need to load default again, it will save the pervious setup
command.

5.1.5 Clock Source Setup


The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose Port
K > Clock Source Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under the "Main Menu Setup" menu, the user should choose port (port A to port D) first and then press K to
setup clock source as below.
= = > > I np u t t he E1 po rt n um b er (A ~ D) : A

The screen of clock will show as below after input E1 port number.

62

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


E 1 Po r t A
= == S ys t em Se t up (C L OC K- N o rm a l M od e ) = == 1 3: 57 : 0 0 1 2/ 0 6/ 2 00 5
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
M a s te r _C l k S ou r ce
S e c on d _C l k S ou r ce
C u r re n t C lo c k
C l k _R e co v er _ Mo d e
C l o ck St a tu s

:
:
:
:
:

IN T E RN A L
IN T E RN A L
MA S T ER _ CL K
MA N U AL
NO R M AL

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

NOTE:
Configuration
Master_Clk Source

Option
Default
INTERNAL, EXTERNAL**, PORT A(E1-LINE), PORT B(E1-LINE), INTERNAL
PORT C(E1-LINE),
PORT D(E1-LINE), PORT A(BUNDLE 0), PORT B(BUNDLE 0),
PORT C(BUNDLE 0), PORT D(BUNDLE 0)
Second_Clk Source
INTERNAL, EXTERNAL**, PORT A(E1-LINE), PORT B(E1-LINE), Add bundle
PORT C(E1-LINE),
PORT D(E1-LINE), PORT A(BUNDLE 0), PORT B(BUNDLE 0),
PORT C(BUNDLE 0), PORT D(BUNDLE 0)
Current Clock
MASTER_CLK,SECOND_CLK,INTERNAL
MASTER_CLK
Clk _Recover_Mode MANUAL, AUTOMATIC
AUTO
Clock Status
NORMAL
NORMAL

**External clock is for low speed tributary port E1/T1/DTE only.

63

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.6 System Alarm Setup


The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
M > System Alarm Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press M from the Main Menu, the screen of System Alarm Setup will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Sy s te m A l ar m S e tu p = = =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
[ T Y PE ]
C L K C h an g e
E t h er n et Li n k

1 7: 05 : 0 4 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

[ A LA R M]
C R IT I CA L
C R IT I CA L

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

NOTE:
Configuration
Clk Change
Ethernet Link

Option
MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR, DISABLE
MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR, DISABLE

64

Default
DISABLE
DISABLE

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.7 System Configuration


L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

S ta r t T i me

OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press C from the Main Menu, the screen of System Configuration will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00

= == Sy s te m C o nf ig u r at i on == =

[ S y st e m]

E th e r ne t P o rt
I P Ad d re s s
:0 0 0. 00 0 . 00 0 .0 0 0
S ub n e t M as k
T r a p I P A dd r es s :0 0 0. 00 0 . 00 0 .0 0 0
G at e w ay IP
C o m mu n it y (G e t) :p u bl ic
C om m u ni t y( S et )
D e v ic e N a me
:L O OP I P 6 70 0
S y s te m L o ca t io n :8 F , No . 8 , H SI N A N N R OA D
S C IE NC E - BA S ED IN D US T RI A L PA R K
H S IN CH U , 3 0 07 7 T A IW A N
S y s te m C o nt a ct :N a me : F A E
T e l: + 88 6 -3 - 57 87 6 9 6
E - ma il : F AE @ lo o p. c om . tw
I P In t er f ac e
L a n R a te Se t up
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e
D a t a L en g th
S t o p B it

13 :5 8 : 21 12 / 06 / 20 0 5
: D IS A BL E
: 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00
: 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00
: p ri v at e

Fa x :+ 8 86 - 3- 5 78 76 9 5

:E T HE RN E T _P O RT
:1 0 0 x3 2 K
:9 6 00
:8 - Bi ts
:1 - Bi t

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

NOTE:
Configuration
Baud Rate
Data Length
Stop Bit

Option
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
7-Bits, 8-Bits
1-Bit, 2-Bits

65

Default
9600
8-Bits
1-Bit

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.8 Display All Time Slot IP Assignment


L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press J from the Main Menu, the screen will show as below. Please refer to 6.1.2.2 for detail information.
L O O P I P6 7 00

= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =

P o rt Bu n dl e U D P C el ls J it t er
D es t I P A dd r e ss St a tu s
ID
N u m Nu m D e la y /s i ze
= = == == = == = = = == == = = == == = = = == = == = == == = = == == = == = ==
A
0
1 30 0
20 2 5 6 0 10 . 00 3 .0 09 . 0 56 ac t iv e

1 0: 57 : 3 0 0 7/ 2 3/ 2 00 7
T i me S l o t

Rx - co u nt e r

= = == == = = =
0 to 31

== = == = == =
20 6 63 2 82 5

< < SP A CE ba r t o r e fr es h or ES C k e y r et u rn t o ma i n m en u > >

Note: 1. The bundle entries are shown on the terminal as above. If the displaying entries are more than one
page, hit space key other view the next page. To return to main menu, hit ESC key.
2. Rx-counter: Rx-counter shows the number when the device receive remote sides packet.

66

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.9 Display Time Slot IP Assignment


L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press H from the Main Menu, the screen to display Time Slot IP Assignment will show as below. For the detail
explanation, please refer to 5.1.2.2.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Di s pl a y S et up ( M AP ) = = =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S

1 7: 11 : 2 5 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

Port
: PO R T_ C
P O/ T S T S P O/ TS T S B ND L I D /U D P N UM D e s t I P A dd r es s
B u n dl e I D : 0
= == = = = = = == == = = = == = == = == = == = == = = = == = == = == = == =
A c t io n
: Ch a ng e b un d l e
F o r ma t
: SA T oP
U D P N u mb e r: 00 0 01
C el l N u m J it t er D e l ay Ji t te r S i ze
T i m e S lo t : 00
= == = == = = = == = == == = = = = == = == = == = ==
T i m e S lo t #: 32
D e s t I P A dd r : 1 72 . 02 0. 0 0 1. 0 01
S i z e i n B yt e s:
3
J i t te r D e la y :
0 0 30
J i t te r S i ze :
256
V L A N:
512
V L A N1 ID :
OFF
V L A N1 pr i or i ty : 0 0 00
V L A N2 ID :
0
V L A N2 pr i or i ty : 0 0 00
C o n fi r m?
0
Ye s
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to ma i n m en u o r s a ve sy s te m s e tu p > >

67

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.10 Clock source Configuration


L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press B from the Main Menu, the screen of Clock Source Configuration will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00

M a s te r _C l k S ou r ce
S e c on d _C l k S ou r ce
C u r re n t C lo c k
C l k _R e co v er _ Mo d e
C l o ck St a tu s

= == Cl o ck So u rc e S e tu p = = =

:
:
:
:
:

1 4: 00 : 2 1 1 2/ 0 6/ 2 00 5

IN T E RN A L
IN T E RN A L
MA S T ER _ CL K
MA N U AL
NO R M AL

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

NOTE:
Configuration
Master_Clk Source

Option
INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, PORT A(E1-LINE),
PORT B(E1-LINE), PORT C(E1-LINE),
PORT D(E1-LINE), PORT A(BUNDLE 0),
PORT B(BUNDLE 0), PORT C(BUNDLE 0), PORT D(BUNDLE 0)
Second_Clk Source
INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, PORT A(E1-LINE),
PORT B(E1-LINE), PORT C(E1-LINE),
PORT D(E1-LINE), PORT A(WAN),
PORT B(BUNDLE 0), PORT C(BUNDLE 0), PORT D(BUNDLE 0)
Current Clock
MASTER_CLK,SECOND_CLK,INTERNAL
Clk _Recover_Mode MANUAL, AUTOMATIC
Clock Status
NORMAL

68

Default
INTERNAL

Add bundle

MASTER_CLK
AUTO
NORMAL

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.11 Byte and Packet Counters


Press D from the Main Menu.
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

The Byte and Packet Counters screen will show as below. Explanations for all parameters are given in the
tables below the screen.
L O O P I P6 7 00

= == By t e a nd Pa c ke t C o un t er s = = =

- - Co u nt e rs
Cl a ss i fi e d P ac k et s R e ce i ve d
MA C B y te Re c ei v ed
MA C B y te Tr a ns m it te d
MA C P a ck e ts Re c ei ve d
MA C P a ck e ts Tr a ns mi t t ed
LA N P o rt Li n k S ta tu s
WA N P o rt Li n k S ta tu s
SN M P P or t L i nk St at u s

1 4: 58 : 0 8 1 0/ 0 2/ 2 00 8

:
45 98 3
:
13 1 51 13 8
: 3 11 3 93 81 2
:
45 98 3
:
1 0 88 81 8
: L i nk Do wn
: L i nk Up
: L i nk Do wn

P or t _A
Po r t _B
P or t _C
P or t _D
Po r t t ra c ki n g s ta te
:
a cq u is i ti o n id l e
i dl e
i dl e
Po r t a da p t_ f re e ze _s t a te : N O
NO
NO
NO
Ja f o v er f lo w c o un t
: 0
0
0
0
Dp l l o ve r fl o w c ou nt
: 0
0
0
0
Ji t te r b u ff e r u nd er r u n : p 1_ # 1 , p 2 _# 1 , p3 _ #1 , p 4_ # 1 , p 5_ # 1 , p6 _ #1 , p 7_
# 1 , p 8_ # 1 , p 9 _# 1 , p 1 0 _# 1 , p1 1 _# 1 , p1 2_ # 1 , p1 3 _# 1 , p1 4 _# 1 , p1 5 _# 1 , p1 6 _#
1 ,
A R P l o ss Co u nt : 6
< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, L EF T k e y t o c le a n > >

69

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Configuration
Classified Pac kets
Rec eived
MAC Byte Transmitted
MAC Pac kets Received
MAC Packets
Transm itted
LAN Port Link Status
W AN Port Link Status
SNMP Port Link Status

Port tracking state

Port_adapt_freeze-state

Jaf overflow count


Dpll overflow count

Jitter buffer under-run


ARP loss c ounter

Description/Explanations
Count of classified packets received. Press < key to reset register to zero.
Count of MAC bytes transmitted. Press < key to reset register to zero.
Count of MAC packets received. Press < key to reset register to zero.
Count of MAC packets transmitted. Press < key to reset register to zero.
Link Status
Link Status
Link Status
Current state of the clock recovery mechanism
idle = not in use
acquisition = frequency acquisition state
tracking 1 = precise phase tracking state
tracking 2 = final (ie. best) state
recover = clock lost
Clock recovery status
no = clock is normal
freeze = When the Ethernet is not stable or the master side clock source is out of
the recovery range, the slave side clock source will enter freeze status
Indicates the num ber of tim es that Jitter attenuator filter (Jaf) overflow has
occurred. Press < key to reset register to zero.

T he num ber of tim e that Digital Phase Clock Loop (DPLL) overflow
has occurred. Press < key to reset register to zero.
Indicates the num ber of tim es that the jitter buffer has been under-run.
Press < key to reset register to zero.
Indicates that the other side did answer the packet request.

Note: Jitter buffer under-run - This is a factory installed diagnostic tool. If a buffer is under-run, a default FF
signal will be sent to corresponding timeslots in both the master device and the slave device.
P1_#1 means that the first bundle buffer in Port A has been under-run once.
P33_#1 means that the first bundle buffer in Port B has been under-run once.
Port Name
Port A
Port B
Port C
Port D

P Index
P1 to P32
P33 to P64
P65 to P96
P97 to P128

70

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.12 Alarm Queue


L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press Q from the Main Menu, the Alarm Queue Configuration will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

---------------------

P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t
P or t

== = U n it Al a rm Q u e ue == =
D
C
A
D
C
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
C
D
C
D
C
D
C

E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:
E1:

MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R
MA J O R

U AS re m ov e -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 49 : 08
U AS re m ov e -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 49 : 08
U AS re m ov e -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 49 : 08
U AS - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 49 : 07
U AS - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 49 : 07
U AS - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 49 : 07
U AS re m ov e -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 40 : 24
U AS - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 40 : 23
L OF - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 40 : 15
L OS - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 40 : 15
E S re m ov e -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 40 : 15
E S - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 40 : 14
U AS re m ov e -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 34 : 08
U AS re m ov e -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 34 : 08
U AS - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 34 : 07
U AS - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 34 : 07
U AS re m ov e -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 19 : 08
U AS re m ov e -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 19 : 08
U AS - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 19 : 07
U AS - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - 18 : 19 : 07

1 8: 56 : 3 0 0 3/ 1 4/ 2 00 0
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00
03 /1 4 / 00

< < ES C k e y r et u rn to p r e vi o us me n u o r S PA CE b ar to ch a ng e p a ge

NOTE:
1. T he latest 40 alarm entries are shown on the terminal as above in two pages of 20 entries
each. If there are more than 20 entries, hit any k ey other than ESC to view the second
page. T o return to main m enu, hit ESC k ey.
2. T otal alarm queue 160 m ax.

71

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.13 Fom Status


When WAN port is optical interface, the main menu will show Fom Status.
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
G - > F OM St a tu s
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press G from the Main Menu, the Fom Status will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = == = F o m S ta tu s == = == =

1 6: 23 : 3 7 1 0/ 2 2/ 2 00 7

C on n e ct o r
: LC
T ra n s ce i ve r : 10 0 0B A SE -L X
L in k Le n gt h : lo n g d is ta n c e( L )
T ec h n ol o gy : Un k no w n
M ed i a
: Si n gl e M od e ( SM )
S pe e d
: 10 0 M B yt es / S ec
E nc o d in g
: 8B 1 0B
L en g t h( 9 /1 2 5 m m f ib e r)
: 1 00 0 0 m
L en g t h( 5 0/ 1 25 mm fi b er )
: 5 00 m
L en g t h( 6 2. 5 /1 2 5 m m f ib er ) : 5 00 m
L en g t h( c op p er )
: - -- -

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

72

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.1.14 All Bundle Counter


When WAN port is optical interface, the main menu will show Fom Status.
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
G - > F OM St a tu s
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press N from the Main Menu, the System Setup (MAP) screen will show as below.
L O O P I P6 7 00
Po Bun
ID
== ===

un d e
rr u n
== = ==

= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =

1 4: 07 : 2 5 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

o v er
m in
ma x
SN
m is s
fr a me j u mp
S N- e rr SN - er r
r r un
l ev e l le v el d r op
o rd e r er r or e r ro r o ut s id wi t hi n
= = == == = == = == == = == = = = == == = == = == == = == = = = == == = == = == == = == =

< < SP A CE ba r t o r e fr es h or ES C k e y r et u rn t o ma i n m en u > >

73

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.2 E1 Sub-Menu
To setup E1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
W hen P is selected and E1 port number is entered, the following Port Menu will show up.
E 1 Po r t B

== = P o rt Me n u == =

0 0: 4 0: 11 # 0 1/ 0 1/ U U9 3

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e

[ SE TU P ]
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
S - > S y st e m S et u p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e & H i s to r y
D - > U p gr a de Fi r mw a re

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad De f au l t C on f ig
Z - > R e se t

Port : A

E 1 Po r t A

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 8: 15 : 2 1 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

74

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.2.1 System Setup


To setup E1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
S > System Setup
E 1 Po r t A

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 8: 15 : 2 1 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

T o do system setup, press S from Port Menu, then the screen will show as below. Please refer
to T able 2-14 Default Software Configuration for detail information.
E 1 Po r t A
F RA M E
=
C OD E
=
C RC
=
R AI
=
A IS
=
C AS
=
S IG N AL L IN G =
C GA
=
O OS
=
F DL
=
S a_ b it
=
I DL E
=
I NT F
=

= == Po r t S ys t em S e t up == =

1 3: 29 : 1 3 2 7/ 0 8/ 2 00 7

O FF
H DB 3
ON
ON
F RA ME D
O FF
T RA NS
N OR M
B US Y
O FF
S a4
0
1 20 O h m

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u > >

Note:
Configuration
E1 Line
Frame
Code
CRC
RAI
FDL
IDLE
Sa_Bit

Option
ON, OFF
HDB3, AMI
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
OFF, FDL, HDLC
0-ff
Sa4, Sa5.Sa8, Sa4+5

75

Default
OFF
HDB3
ON
ON
OFF
D5
Sa4

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Configuration
AIS
OOS

Option

Default
OFF
IDLE

ON, OFF
IDLE, BUSY_IDLE, IDLE_BUSY, BUSY

5.2.2 Loopback Setup


To setup E1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
L > Loopback Setup
E 1 Po r t A

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 8: 15 : 2 1 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

76

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Under Port Menu, press L to do Loopback T est, then the screen will show as below. Use arrow
keys to m ove the cursor, press ENT ER key to select items.
E 1 Po r t A
= == Po r t L oo p ba ck T es t = = =
A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT
- N EA R -E N D L OO P BA C K

: *O F F

LO C AL

PLB

1 8: 24 : 1 1 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

LLB

- S EN D L O OP B AC K A C TI VA T E C O DE TO FA R -E N D:
* PA Y LO A D
- S EN D L O OP B AC K D E AC TI V A TE CO D E T O F AR - EN D:
* PA Y LO A D

- S TA T US :
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

NOTE:
a. Near end loop-backs
1. Local loop-back: the out-going signal is looped back to the device to verify the device integrity.
2. Line loop-back: the entire incoming signal is looped back towards the line to isolate the device from the line
3. Payload loop-back: the payload of the incoming signal is looped back towards the line. This is done after
the framer framed on the incoming signal.
b. Far end loop-backs
1. Remote line loop-back: the signal received by the remote unit is looped back towards the local device to
verify line integrity.
2. Remote payload loop-back: the payload of the signal received by the remote unit is looped back towards
the local device to verify the payload integrity.
c. Loop-back timer
The period of time from the activation of a loop-back to its de-activation is controlled by a
timer. The default value of this timer is 60 seconds.
d. Diagnostics
Pseudo-random patterns are commonly used for diagnostic tests of digital systems. For E1, a 15-bit register
PRBS (pseudo-random binary sequence) pattern is standard practice. This pattern is available for testing
local system integrity by local loopback test, and for measuring the line quality. The diagnostics scenario is
as follows:
1. First, send a remote loopback command to cause the remote facility to loopback DS0 time slots.
2. Then, activate the local PRBS diagnostics operation by using the Test command to enable the pattern
and choose for test all time slots, or only idle time slots.
3. The FULL diagnostic uses a framed pattern. This is useful for testing full E1 loopback at the far-end.
When the PRBS pattern sync is found, a bit error counter tracks total bit errors. It is advised to send the
pattern for more than 15-minute interval to evaluate the quality of loop condition and facility reliability.
User may utilize the > key to inject a single error, the < key to reset error counter, and ESC to terminate
the test. Read the performance report to understand the type of errors that occur.

77

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.2.3 Alarm Setup


To setup E1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
M > Alarm Setup
E 1 Po r t A

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 8: 15 : 2 1 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

T o do alarm setup, press M from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up. Please
use T ab key to choose the configuration.
E 1 Po r t A
== = P o rt Al a rm S e t up == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
[ T Y PE ]
[ T HR E SH O LD ]
RAI
AIS
LOS
LOF
BPV
1 0 E- 5
ES
00 1
UAS
00 1
CSS
00 1
B U N DL E S T AT U S
M A C C H AN G E

1 3: 33 : 2 5 1 2/ 0 6/ 2 00 5

[ A LA R M]
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

NOTE:
Configuration
E1 Line

RAI
AIS
LOS
LOF
BPV
ES

Options

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR


DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
Alarm
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
Threshold 10E- (5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarm
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

78

Default
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
10E-5
MAJOR

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Configuration
UAS
CSS

Threshold
Alarm
Threshold
Alarm
Threshold

Bundle Status
Change
Mac

Options

Default

1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900

1
MAJOR
1
MAJOR
1

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

For description of acronym, please refer to Glossary

5.2.4 Clear Alarm History


To setup E1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
X > Clear Alarm History
E 1 Po r t A

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 8: 15 : 2 1 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under Port Menu, press X to clear alarm queue and history, then press Y or N to confirm
it.

> > Cl e ar al a rm hi s to ry - a r e y ou su r e? [Y /N ]

79

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.2.5 Send Bert


To setup E1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
B > Send Bert
E 1 Po r t A

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 8: 15 : 2 1 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

80

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Press B from Port Menu the Bert tset screen will show as below. The procedure to do Bert test
will show as below.
Note: For Bert test, the user need to connect two m achines in order to do this setup.
E 1 Po r t A
== =
B e rt te st
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
T y pe
Di r ec t
T i me S lo t F r om
T i me S lo t N u m

=
=
=
=

= ==

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

O FF
L IN E
1
1

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

Note:
Bert test procedure for device 1 and device 2:
For device 1: source IP address subnet Gateway IP create bundle choose pot press
B to do send Bert setup choose type (full or N*64)choose PCM then press
enter, Send Bert test setup up successfully.
* Type: off, PRBS_FULL, N*64K
Direct: PCM (remote side), LINE (back to E1 test)
* If the user uses the entire slot, they can choose PRBS_FULL. If they use certain timeslot,
they should choose N*64K.
* When the user chooses PRBS, they cannot choose timeslot. When they choose N*64K, they
can enter the range of timeslot from 1-31.
For device 2: all the setup is same as device 1, please follow the setup procedure of device 1 to do device 2
Best test setup.

81

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.2.6 1-Hour Performance Report


Press 1 from E1 Port Menu to view the 1-hour performance report. Use TAB key to select
register type, USER or LINE. T he current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
> > Se l ec t R e gi s te r T yp e ? * US E R

LI N E

After pressing ENT ER from the above screen, the following screen will show up
E 1 Po r t A
= == Po r t 1 -H o ur St at . Re p or t = = =
10 :2 4 : 28 08 / 28 / 20 0 7
S t a rt Ti m e = 1 1 :0 9 :2 3 1 2 /0 6 /2 0 05
USER
- - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 2 9 3 s ec o nd s
(E S )
( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) ( DM )
( CS S )
Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al
: 0
2 93
0
0
0
0
1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
0
1
2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
0
0
3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
0
0
4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
0
0
- - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 4
(E S )
( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S)
Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l
: 0
1 26 0 0 0
0
12 / 05 / 20 0 5
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -12 / 04 / 20 0 5
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -12 / 03 / 20 0 5
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -12 / 02 / 20 0 5
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -12 / 01 / 20 0 5
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -11 / 30 / 20 0 5
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -11 / 29 / 20 0 5
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --

( DM )
0
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -

( CS S )
1
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -

< < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > >


< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

NOTE:
Definition
Performance
Description
2-Frame/Multiframe
Parameter
ES
Error Second
BPV1, OOF1, or CS1.
UAS
Unavailable Second
10 consecutive SES
BES
Bursty Error Second
1 < BPV < 2048
SES
Severe Error Second
BPV 2048, or OOF 1
DM
Degraded Minute
BPV 123
CSS
Controlled Slip Second Frame slip 1
For description of acronym, please refer to Glossary

82

Definition
16-Frame/Multiframe
CRC 1, OOF 1, or CS 1.
10 consecutive SEC
1 < CRC < 805
CRC 805, or OOF 1.
CRC 47
Frame slip 1

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.2.7 24-Hour Performance Report


Press 2 from E1 Port Menu to view the 24-hour performance report, use TAB key to select
register type, USER or LINE, press ENTER.
> > Se l ec t R e gi s te r T yp e ? * US E R LI N E
> > Se l ec t P a ra m et e r ? * E S UA S B ES S E S

CSS

DM

AS

EFS

BP V

Use the cursor to select the desired parameter. The current selection will be highlighted by an
asterisk (*) and press ENT ER key to view the report as follows.
E 1 Po r t A
= = = P or t 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = =
1 0: 24 : 2 8
S t a rt Ti m e = 1 1 :0 9 :2 3 1 2 /0 6 /2 0 05
USER ES
- - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 3 8 4 s ec o nd s
- - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 4
(E S )
( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) ( DM )
Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al
: 0
3 84
0
0
0
Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l
: 0
1 26 0 0 0
0
0

0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

( CS S )
0
1

- - US E R, ES , L a st 96 1 5 - Mi n I n te r va l :
01 - 08 > 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
09 - 16 > 0
0
0
0
0
0
- -- - - - -- - 17 - 24 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 25 - 32 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 33 - 40 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 41 - 48 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 49 - 56 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 57 - 64 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 65 - 72 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 73 - 80 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 81 - 88 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 89 - 96 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - < < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > >
< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh

NOTE
Definition
Performance
Description
2-Frame/Multiframe
Parameter
ES
Error Second
BPV1, OOF1, or CS1.
UAS
Unavailable Second
10 consecutive SES
BES
Bursty Error Second
1 < BPV < 2048
SES
Severe Error Second
BPV 2048, or OOF 1
CSS
Controlled Slip Second
Frame slip 1
DM
Degraded Minute
BPV 123
AS
Available Second
Frame slip 1
EFS
Error Free Second
Error Free Second
BPV
Bipolar Violation
Bipolar Error Count
For description of acronym, please refer to Glossary

83

Definition
16-Frame/Multiframe
CRC 1, OOF 1, or CS 1.
10 consecutive SES
1 < CRC < 805
CRC 805, or OOF 1.
Frame slip 1
CRC 47
Frame slip 1
Error Free Second
Bipolar Error Count

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.2.8 Line Availability


Under Port Menu, press A to view the line availability as the following screen shows,
T he information, based on user performance register set, includes the valid seconds, available
seconds, unavailable seconds and the line availability.
E 1 Po r t A

== = P o rt Li n e A va il a b il i ty == =

St a rt Ti m e

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

: 11 : 09 : 23 12 / 06 / 20 05

- - Li n e A va i la b il i ty d u r in g L a st 24 - Ho u r:
Va l id Se c on d s
: 13 0 71 se c on d s
Av a il a bl e S e co n ds : 0 s ec o nd s
Un a va i la b le Se c on ds : 13 0 71 se c on d s
Li n e A va l ia b il i ty : 0. 0 %

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

5.2.9 Unit Configuration


To view the unit configuration, press C from Port Menu, then the screen will show as below.
Please refer to table 2-14 Default software configuration for detail inform ation.
E 1 Po r t A
F RA M E
=
C OD E
=
C RC
=
R AI
=
A IS
=
C AS
=
S IG N AL L IN G =
C GA
=
O OS
=
F DL
=
S a_ b it
=
I DL E
=
I NT F
=

= == Po r t S ys t em S e t up == =

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

O FF
H DB 3
ON
ON
F RA ME D
O FF
T RA NS
N OR M
B US Y
O FF
S a4
0
1 20 O h m

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >

Note:
Configuration
E1 Line
Frame
Code
CRC
RAI
FDL
IDLE
Sa_Bit
AIS

Option
ON, OFF
HDB3, AMI
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
OFF, FDL, HDLC
0-ff
Sa4, Sa5.Sa8, Sa4+5
ON, OFF

84

Default
OFF
HDB3
ON
ON
OFF
D5
Sa4
OFF

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Configuration
OOS

Option
IDLE, BUSY_IDLE, IDLE_BUSY, BUSY

Default
IDLE

5.2.10 Unit Status


Press I from Port Menu, to show the screen of Status as below.
E 1 Po r t A

= == Po r t S ta tu s == =

- - LI N E - LO S
:
LO F
:
RC V A I S :
RC V R A I :
XM T A I S :
XM T R A I :
BP V E R RO R
ES E R RO R

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
C O UN T : 0
C O UN T : 0

- - TE S T - PA T TE R N T RA N SM I TT ED : O F F
NE A R- E ND LO O PB A CK
: OFF

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

5.2.11 Unit Alarm History


To view the unit alarm history, press H from Port Menu.
E 1 Po r t A
L O C AL
[ A L AR M -T Y PE ]
RAI
AIS
LOS
LOF
BPV
ES
UAS
CSS
B U N DL E S T AT U S
M A C C H AN G E

= == Po r t A la r m Hi s t or y = = =
[T H RE SH O L D]

10 E- 5
1
1
1

[ CU R R- S TA T E]
OK
OK
A LM
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK

[ CO U NT ]
0
0
1
0
0
1
15
1
0
0

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7
[A L AR M ]
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

NOTE:
Configuration
E1 Line

RAI
AIS
LOS
LOF

Options
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

85

Default
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Configuration
BPV
ES
UAS
CSS

Alarm
Threshold
Alarm
Threshold
Alarm
Threshold
Alarm
Threshold

Bundle Status
Change
Mac

Options

Default

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR


10E- (5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900

MAJOR
10E-5
MAJOR
1
MAJOR
1
MAJOR
1

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

For description of acronym, please refer to Glossary

5.2.12 Fom Status


Only when W AN port is optical interface, the screen will show as below.
E 1 Po r t A

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y
G - > F om St a tu s

1 6: 23 : 3 7 1 0/ 2 2/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

86

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

L O O P I P6 7 00

== = == = F o m S ta tu s == = == =

1 6: 23 : 3 7 1 0/ 2 2/ 2 00 7

C on n e ct o r
: LC
T ra n s ce i ve r : 10 0 0B A SE -L X
L in k Le n gt h : lo n g d is ta n c e( L )
T ec h n ol o gy : Un k no w n
M ed i a
: Si n gl e M od e ( SM )
S pe e d
: 10 0 M B yt es / S ec
E nc o d in g
: 8B 1 0B
L en g t h( 9 /1 2 5 m m f ib e r)
: 1 00 0 0 m
L en g t h( 5 0/ 1 25 mm fi b er )
: 5 00 m
L en g t h( 6 2. 5 /1 2 5 m m f ib er ) : 5 00 m
L en g t h( c op p er )
: - -- -

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

5.3 T1 Sub-Menu
To setup T1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. T he user can choose port B to do setup.
T hen the following Port Menu of T 1 will show.
T 1 Po r t B

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

87

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.3.1 System Setup


To setup T1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
S > System Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

T 1 Po r t B

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

88

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


By Pressing S, the system setup menu is displayed as follows. Please refer to the table below
for detail information.
1 P or t B
= = = P or t S y st e m Se t u p = ==
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
F RA M E
=
C OD E
=
Y EL
=
A IS
=
C AS
=
S IG N AL L IN G =
C GA
=
O OS
=
I NB A ND
=
I DL E
=
I NT F
=
L BO
=
F DL
=

1 0 :2 4: 2 8 0 8 /2 8 /2 0 07

N ON E
B 8Z S
ON
O FF
O FF
T RA NS
N OR M
B US Y
ON
0
L ON G H A UL
0 dB
O FF

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

Note:
Configuration

T1 Line

Option

Default

Frame

D4, None, ESF, ESF & T1 403

None

Code

B82S, AMI

B82S

YEL

ON, OFF

ON

AIS

ON, OFF

OFF

CAS

ON, OFF

OFF

OOS

IDLE, BUSY_IDLE, IDLE_BUSY, BUSY

IDLE

Inband

ON, OFF

OFF

IDLE

O-ff

INTF

LONG HAUL, SHORT HAUL

LONG HAUL

LBO

LONG HAUL = LBO (0dB, -7.5dB, -15dB)

0-110

SHORT HAUL = LBO (1-110, 110-220,


223-330, 330-440, 440-550, 550-660)
FDL

OFF, FDL

OFF

89

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.3.2 Loopback Setup


To setup T1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
L > Loopback Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

T 1 Po r t B

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

90

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


To enter the T1 status menu, press L. The following screen appears. Please refer to Chapter
4 for detail information.
T 1 Po r t B
= == Po r t L oo p ba ck T es t = = =
A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT
- N EA R -E N D L OO P BA C K

: *O F F

LO C AL

PLB

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

LLB

- S EN D L O OP B AC K A C TI VA T E C O DE TO FA R -E N D:
* IN - BA N D AT &T - P A NS I -P A N SI - L
- S EN D L O OP B AC K D E AC TI V A TE CO D E T O F AR - EN D:
* IN - BA N D AT &T - P A NS I -P A N SI - L

- S TA T US :
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

5.3.3 Alarm Setup


To setup T1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
M > Alarm Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

91

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

T 1 Po r t B

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press M to view the alarm histor y.


T 1 Po r t B
== = P o rt Al a rm S e t up == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
[ T Y PE ]
[ T HR E SH O LD ]
YEL
AIS
LOS
LOF
BPV
1 0 E- 5
ES
00 1
UAS
00 1
CSS
00 1
B U N DL E S T AT U S
M A C C H AN G E

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

[ A LA R M]
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

NOTE:
Configuration
E1 Line

YEL
AIS
LOS
LOF
BPV
ES
UAS
CSS

Alarm
Threshold
Alarm
Threshold
Alarm
Threshold
Alarm

Options
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
10E- (5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

92

Default
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
10E-5
MAJOR
1
MAJOR
1
MAJOR

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Configuration
Threshold
Bundle Status
Change
Mac

Options

Default

1-900

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

For description of acronym, please refer to Glossary

5.3.4 Bert Test


To setup T1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
B > Send Bert
L L OO P I P 67 0 0

= == Ma i n Me n u = = =

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 2 6 :0 7 1 1 /2 7 /2 0 08
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

T 1 Po r t B

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

93

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Press B the Bert test screen will show as below. Note: For Bert test, the user need to connect
two m achines in order to do this setup.
T 1 Po r t B
== =
B e rt te st
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
T y pe
Di r ec t
T i me S lo t F r om
T i me S lo t N u m

=
=
=
=

= ==

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

O FF
L IN E
1
1

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

Note: Bert test procedure for device 1 and device 2:


For device 1: source IP address subnet Gateway IP create bundle choose pot
press B to do send Bert setup choose type (full or N*64)choose PCM
then press enter, Send Bert test setup up successfully.
* Type: off, PRBS_FULL, N*64K
Direct: PCM (remote side), LINE (back to E1 test)
* If the user uses the entire slot, they can choose PRBS_FULL. If they use certain
timeslot, they should choose N*64K.
* When the user chooses PRBS, they cannot choose timeslot. When they choose
N*64K, they can enter the range of timeslot from 1-31.
For device 2: all the setup is same as device 1, please follow the setup procedure of device 1 to do
device 2 Best test setup.

94

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.3.5 Clear Performance Data


To setup T1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
K > Clear Performance Data
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

T 1 Po r t B

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press K to show Clear Performance Data screen.

= > > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D a ta (Y / N) ?

95

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.3.6 Clear Alarm History


To setup T1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
X > Clear Alarm History
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

T 1 Po r t B

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press X to show Clear Alarm Histor y screen.

> > Cl e ar al a rm hi s to ry - a r e y ou su r e ? [ Y/ N ]

96

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.3.7 1-Hour Performance Report


Under Port Menu, press 1 to view the 1-hour performance report.
T 1 Po r t B
= = = P or t 1 - Ho u r S ta t. R ep o rt == =
1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7
S t a rt Ti m e = 1 5 :0 7 :1 4 1 0 /0 3 /2 0 06
USER
- - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 0 se c on d s
(E S )
( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) ( CS S )
Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al
: 0
0
0
0
0
1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - 2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - 3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - 4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 0
(E S )
( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S)
Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -10 / 02 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -10 / 01 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 30 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 29 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 28 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 27 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 26 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --

( CS S )
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -

< < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > >


< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

5.3.8 24-Hour Performance Report


Under Port Menu, press 2 to view the 24-hour performance report.
T 1 Po r t B
= = = P or t 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = =
1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7
S t a rt Ti m e = 1 5 :2 0 :1 6 1 0 /0 3 /2 0 06
USER ES
- - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 0 se c on d s
- - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 0
(E S )
( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) ( CS S )
Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al
: 0
0
0
0
0
Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - - - US E R, ES , L a st 96 1 5 - Mi n I n te r va l :
01 - 08 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 09 - 16 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 17 - 24 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 25 - 32 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 33 - 40 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 41 - 48 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 49 - 56 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 57 - 64 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 65 - 72 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 73 - 80 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 81 - 88 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 89 - 96 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - < < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > >
< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

97

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.3.9 Line Availability


Under Port Menu, press A to view line availability as the following screen shows.
T 1 Po r t B
St a rt Ti m e

== = P o rt Li n e A va il a b il i ty == =

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

: 15 : 20 : 16 10 / 03 / 20 06

- - Li n e A va i la b il i ty d u r in g L a st 24 - Ho u r:
Va l id Se c on d s
: 0 s ec o nd s
Av a il a bl e S e co n ds : 0 s ec o nd s
Un a va i la b le Se c on ds : 0 s ec o nd s
Li n e A va l ia b il i ty : 21 4 74 8 36 . 48 %

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

5.3.10 Unit Configuration


To view the unit configuration, press C from Port m enu, then the screen will show as below.
T 1 Po r t B
= = = P or t 1 - Ho u r S ta t. R ep o rt == =
1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7
S t a rt Ti m e = 1 5 :0 7 :1 4 1 0 /0 3 /2 0 06
USER
- - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 0 se c on d s
(E S )
( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) ( CS S )
Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al
: 0
0
0
0
0
1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - 2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - 3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - 4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 0
(E S )
( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S)
Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -10 / 02 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -10 / 01 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 30 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 29 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 28 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 27 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 26 / 20 0 6
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --

( CS S )
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -

< < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > >


< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

98

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.3.11 Unit Status


Press I from the port menu, to show the screen of Unit Status as below.
T 1 Po r t B

= == Po r t S ta tu s == =

- - LI N E - LO S
:
LO F
:
RC V A I S :
RC V Y E L :
XM T A I S :
XM T Y E L :
BP V E R RO R
ES E R RO R

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

LOS
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
C O UN T : 0
C O UN T : 0

- - TE S T - PA T TE R N T RA N SM I TT ED : O F F
NE A R- E ND LO O PB A CK
: OFF

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

5.3.12 Unit Alarm History


To view the unit alarm history, press H from the Port Menu.
T 1 Po r t B
L O C AL
[ A L AR M -T Y PE ]
RAI
AIS
LOS
LOF
BPV
ES
UAS
CSS
B U N DL E S T AT U S
M A C C H AN G E

= == Po r t A la r m Hi s t or y = = =
[T H RE SH O L D]

10 E- 5
1
1
1

[ CU R R- S TA T E]
OK
OK
A LM
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK

[ CO U NT ]
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7
[A L AR M ]
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

NOTE:
Configuration
E1 Line

RAI
AIS
LOS
LOF
BPV
ES
UAS

Alarm
Threshold
Alarm
Threshold
Alarm

Options
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
10E- (5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

99

Default
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
10E-5
MAJOR
1
MAJOR

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

Configuration

CSS

Options

Threshold
Alarm
Threshold

Bundle Status
Change
Mac

Default

1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900

1
MAJOR
1

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

For description of acronym, please refer to Glossary

5.3.13 Fom Status


When WAN port is optical interface; the main menu will show Fom Status.
T 1 Po r t B

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y
G - > F om St a tu s

1 0: 24 : 2 8 0 8/ 2 8/ 2 00 7

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry
B - > S e nd Be r t

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

L O O P I P6 7 00

== = == = F o m S ta tu s == = == =

C on n e ct o r
: LC
T ra n s ce i ve r : 10 0 0B A SE -L X
L in k Le n gt h : lo n g d is ta n c e( L )
T ec h n ol o gy : Un k no w n
M ed i a
: Si n gl e M od e ( SM )
S pe e d
: 10 0 M B yt es / S ec
E nc o d in g
: 8B 1 0B
L en g t h( 9 /1 2 5 m m f ib e r)
: 1 00 0 0 m
L en g t h( 5 0/ 1 25 mm fi b er )
: 5 00 m
L en g t h( 6 2. 5 /1 2 5 m m f ib er ) : 5 00 m
L en g t h( c op p er )
: - -- -

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh

100

1 6: 23 : 3 7 1 0/ 2 2/ 2 00 7

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.4 DTE (V.35/V.36/RS232/RS449/EIA530/X.21/RS422) Sub-Menu


To setup DTE you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. T he user can choose either port C or port
D to do setup. Then the following Port Menu of DTE (V.35) port will show.
Note: For DTE setup, the user can only choose port C or port D to do this setup.
D T E P o rt C

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > D TE Co n fi g ur a ti on
I - > D TE St a tu s
H - > A la r m H is t or y

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

1 0: 44 : 2 1 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

[ SE T U P]
S - > Sy s te m S e tu p
L - > Lo o pb a ck Te s t
M - > Al a rm Se t up
X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Hi s to ry

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f
O - > L og On
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

101

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.4.1 DTE Configuration


By Pressing C, the unit setup menu is displayed as follows.
D T E P o rt C

= == Po r t S ta tu s == =

1 0: 46 : 2 6 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

D T E P o rt C
[ - - -- - -- C h a nn e l
mode
Rate
T X _ Cl o ck
R X _ Cl o ck
Data
RTS
TTM
DCD
intf

L O CA L - - -- -- - - ]
: 0
: FU L L
: 64 K Bp s
: No r ma l
: No r ma l
: No r ma l
: Ac t iv e
: Of f
: No r ma l
: V3 5

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

5.4.2 DTE Status


To enter the DT E status menu, press I. The following screen appears.
D T E P o rt C

= == Po r t S ta tu s == =

1 0: 47 : 1 2 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

[ - - -- - - L OC A L - -- - -- ]
D T E -C ex i st e d : Y E S
R T S L O SS
: Y ES
E X T _C L K L OS S
: NO
D S R : NO
C T S : NO
D C D : YE S
D T R : NO
R T S : NO
[ L o op b ac k S t at u s]
D T E L o op b ac k
: O FF

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

102

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.4.3 Alarm History


Press H to view the alarm history.
L O O P I P6 7 00
[ P o rt ]
C :

[ St a te ]
AL A RM

= = = A la r m H is to r y = = =
[ Co un t ]
1

1 0: 50 : 5 0 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

[ Al a rm ]
M AJ O R

< < ES C t o r e tu r n t o pr e v io u s m en u , S PA C E to r ef r es h , U k e y t o ch a n ge un i t > >

NOTE:
Configuration
Port C

Options

Default

MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR, DISABLE

DISABLE

5.4.4 System Setup


To setup DTE you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
S > System Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

103

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. T he user can choose either port C or port
D to do setup. Then the following Port Menu of DTE (V.35) port will show.
Note: For DTE setup, the user can only choose port C or port D to do this setup.
D T E P o rt C

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > D TE Co n fi g ur a ti on
I - > D TE St a tu s
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 0: 44 : 2 1 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

[ SE T U P]
S - > Sy s te m S e tu p
L - > Lo o pb a ck Te s t
M - > Al a rm Se t up
X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Hi s to ry

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f
O - > L og On
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press S to do system setup.


D T E P o rt C
= == Po r t S ys t em S e t up == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S

1 0: 53 : 0 4 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

D T E P o rt C
[ - - -- - -- C h a nn e l
mode
Rate
T X _ Cl o ck
R X _ Cl o ck
Data
RTS
TTM
DCD
intf

L O CA L - - -- -- - - ]
: 0
: FU L L
: 64 K Bp s
: No r ma l
: No r ma l
: No r ma l
: Ac t iv e
: Of f
: No r ma l
: V3 5

< < ES C k e y t o p re v io us m en u , S PA C E b ar to a n o th e r p ag e > >

NOTE:
Configuration

Options

Mode
Full, N*64K
Rate
64KBps
Tx_Clock
Normal, Inverted
Rx_Clock
Normal, Inverted
Data
Normal, Inverted
RTS
Active, Permanent
TTM
On, Off
DCD
Normal, On
Intf (V.35)
V.35
Intf (V.36)
X.21, RS232, EIA530, RS422, RS449, V.36
For description of acronym, please refer to Glossary

104

Default
Full
64KBps
Normal
Normal
Normal
Active
Off
Normal
V.35
RS422

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.4.5 Loopback Test


To setup DTE you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
L > Loopback Test
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. T he user can choose either port C or port
D to do setup. Then the following Port Menu of DTE (V.35) port will show.
Note: For DTE setup, the user can only choose port C or port D to do this setup.
D T E P o rt C

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > D TE Co n fi g ur a ti on
I - > D TE St a tu s
H - > A la r m H is t or y

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

1 0: 44 : 2 1 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

[ SE T U P]
S - > Sy s te m S e tu p
L - > Lo o pb a ck Te s t
M - > Al a rm Se t up
X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Hi s to ry

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f
O - > L og On
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

105

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


T o enter the Loopback and T est screen, press L. The following screen appears.
L O O P I P6 7 00
== = U n it Lo o pb a ck a n d T e st == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E ; E N TE R K E Y: IT E M SE L E CT ;

1 3: 48 : 5 8 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

D T E P o rt C
[ T E ST ME N U]
D T E L o op b ac k

: *O FF

TO - DT E

T O- W AN

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

5.4.6 Alarm Setup


To setup DTE you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
M > Alarm Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

106

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. T he user can choose either port C or port
D to do setup. Then the following Port Menu of DTE (V.35) port will show.
Note: For DTE setup, the user can only choose port C or port D to do this setup.
D T E P o rt C

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > D TE Co n fi g ur a ti on
I - > D TE St a tu s
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 0: 44 : 2 1 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

[ SE T U P]
S - > Sy s te m S e tu p
L - > Lo o pb a ck Te s t
M - > Al a rm Se t up
X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Hi s to ry

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f
O - > L og On
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

T o set up the alarm configuration, press M. The following screen is displayed.


L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Al a rm Se tu p == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
[ P o rt ]
C :

1 4: 55 : 1 9 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

[A l ar m ]
MA J OR

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

NOTE:
Configuration
Port C

Options
MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR, DISABLE

107

Default
MAJOR

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.4.7 Clear Alarm History


To setup DTE you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
X > Clear Alarm History
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. T he user can choose either port C or port
D to do setup. Then the following Port Menu of DTE (V.35) port will show.
Note: For DTE setup, the user can only choose port C or port D to do this setup.
D T E P o rt C

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > D TE Co n fi g ur a ti on
I - > D TE St a tu s
H - > A la r m H is t or y

== = P o rt Me nu = ==

1 0: 44 : 2 1 0 9/ 0 6/ 2 00 7

[ SE T U P]
S - > Sy s te m S e tu p
L - > Lo o pb a ck Te s t
M - > Al a rm Se t up
X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Hi s to ry

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f
O - > L og On
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

108

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Under Port Menu, press X to clear alarm histor y, then press Y or N to confirm it.

> > Cl e ar al a rm hi s to ry - a r e y ou su r e ? [ Y/ N ]

5.5 DS3/E3 Sub-Menu


To setup DS3/E3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
Main Menu for Electrical Interface:
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Note: If WAN port is optical interface, Display option will show G -> Fom Status.

Main Menu for Optical Interface:


L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Note: If W AN port is optical interface, Display option will show G -> Fom Status.

109

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port A, then the following Port Menu of DS3/E3
is shown below. W hen the user plug-in the DS3 card, the whole unit is for port A only.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 6: 52 : 4 0 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

5.5.1 System Setup


To setup DS3/E3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
S > System Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

110

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. The user can choose port A only to do
setup. Then the Port Menu of DS3/E3 is shown below.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press S to do system setup.


= = = D S3 / E3 Sy s te m S e tu p = = =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S

1 7: 13 : 5 5 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

C AR D T Y PE = D S3
T X- L EN G TH = 0 -2 25
X MT - AI S
= ON

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

NOTE:
Configuration
Card type
TX-LENGTH
XMT-AIS

Options
E3/DS3
0 to 225, 225 to 450
ON, OFF

Default
DS3
0 to 225
ON

111

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.5.2 Loopback Setup


To setup DS3/E3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
L > Loopback Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. The user can choose port A only to do
setup. Then the Port Menu of DS3/E3 is shown below.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

112

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


To enter the Loopback Setup screen, press L. The following screen appears.
= = = D S3 / E3 Lo o pb ac k Te s t = ==
A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT
- N EA R -E N D L OO P BA C K

: *O F F

LL B

L OC A L- A

1 7: 38 : 0 1 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

L OC A L- D

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

5.5.3 Clear Performance Data


To setup DS3/E3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
K > Clear Performance Data
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

113

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. The user can choose port A only to do
setup. Then the Port Menu of DS3/E3 is shown below.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Press K to show Clear Performance Data.

= > > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D a ta (Y / N) ?

114

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.5.4 Alarm Setup


To setup DS3/E3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
M > Alarm Setup
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. The user can choose port A only to do
setup. Then the Port Menu of DS3/E3 is shown below.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

115

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


T o do alarm setup, press M from Port Menu, then the following screen will show up. Please use
T ab k ey to choose the configuration.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >


= == DS 3 /E 3 A l ar m S e tu p = = =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
[ T Y PE ]
[ T HR E SH O LD ]
LOS
LCV
1 0 E- 5
LES
00 1
SEFS
00 1
UAS
00 1
B U N DL E S T AT U S
M A C C H AN G E

1 1: 15 : 0 2 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8

[ A LA R M]
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R
M A JO R

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

NOTE:
Configuration
LOS

E1 Line

Alarm
LCV
Threshold
Alarm
LES
Threshold
Alarm
SEFS
Threshold
Alarm
UAS
Threshold
Bundle Status
Change
Mac

Options

Default

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR


DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
10E- (5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900
DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR
1-900

MAJOR
MAJOR
10E-5
MAJOR
1
MAJOR
1
MAJOR
1

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

DISABLE, MAJOR, CRITICAL, MINOR

MAJOR

For description of acronym, please refer to Glossary

116

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.5.5 Clear Alarm History


To setup DS3/E3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Choose a Port
X > Clear Alarm History
L O O P I P6 7 00

== = M a in Me nu = ==

S e r ia l N u mb e r
: 11 03 8 1
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: Ve r. F
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 2 . 01 11 / 27 / 20 0 8

S ta r t T i me

1 4: 26 : 0 7 1 1/ 2 7/ 2 00 8
OS C V er : OC X O
: 14 : 00 : 08 1 1 / 27 / 20 0 8

[ D I SP L AY ]
C - > S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n
J - > A ll Ti m e S lo t I P A s si g nm e nt
H - > T im e S l ot IP As si g n me n t
B - > C lo c k s ou r ce Co nf i g ur a ti o n
D - > L in k S t at u s
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e
N - > A ll Bu n dl e C o un te r

[ SE TU P ]
C - > S y st e m S et u p
T - > T i me Sl o t I P A ss i gn me n t
W - > F i rm w ar e T r an s fe r
V - > S t or e /R e tr i ev e C o nf ig u r at i on
K - > C l oc k S o ur c e S et u p
M - > S y st e m A la r m S et u p

[ L O G]
P - > C ho o se Po r t
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu

[ MI SC ]
Y - > L o ad de f au l t & R e bo ot
Z - > R e se t
X - > C l ea r A l ar m Q u eu e
A - > A l ar m C u t O ff

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under the Controller Menu, press P to choose port. The user can choose port A only to do
setup. Then the Port Menu of DS3/E3 is shown below.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

Under Port Menu, press X to clear alarm histor y, then press Y or N to confirm it.

> > Cl e ar al a rm hi s to ry - a r e y ou su r e ? [ Y/ N ]

117

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.5.6 1-Hour Performance (Perf.) Report


The full path for 1 Hour Perf. Report is as follows:
1 > 1 Hour Perf. Report
To display 1-Hour Perf. Report, press 1 from the Controller Menu.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

The 1 Hour Perf. Report menu will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor and TAB key to roll the
desired option and the screen will show as below
= = = D S 3/ E 3 1 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = =

> > Se l ec t R e gi s te r T yp e ? * US E R

LI N E

Note:
Type
T ype

Option
User, Line

118

1 1: 59 : 1 7 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


After pressing ENT ER from the above screen, the following screen will show up.
User:
= = = D S 3/ E 3 1 -H o ur St at . Re p or t = = =
1 3: 15 : 4 6 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8
S t a rt Ti m e = 1 1 :0 6 :2 3 0 1 /1 7 /2 0 08
USER
- - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 5 6 2 s ec o nd s
(L E S) ( UA S ) ( SE F S) (L C V)
Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al
: 0
5 62
0
0
1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
- - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 8
(L E S) ( UA S ) ( SE F S) (L C V)
Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l
: 0
7 20 0
0
0
01 / 16 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 15 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 14 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 13 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 12 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 11 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 10 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -< < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > >
< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

Line:
= = = D S 3/ E 3 1 -H o ur St at . Re p or t = = =
1 3: 21 : 3 6 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8
S t a rt Ti m e = 1 1 :0 6 :2 3 0 1 /1 7 /2 0 08
LINE
- - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 1 3 s e co n ds
(L E S) ( UA S ) ( SE F S) (L C V)
Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al
: 0
13
0
0
1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0
9 00
0
0
- - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 9
(L E S) ( UA S ) ( SE F S) (L C V)
Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l
: 0
8 10 0
0
0
01 / 16 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 15 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 14 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 13 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 12 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 11 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -01 / 10 / 20 0 8
: -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -< < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > >
< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

119

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.5.7 24-Hour Performance (Perf.) Report


The full path for 24 Hour Perf. Report is as follows:
2 > 24 Hour Perf. Report
To display 24-Hour Perf. Report, press 2 from the Controller Menu.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

The 24 Hour Perf. Report menu will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor and TAB key to roll the
desired option and the screen will show as below
= = = D S 3/ E 3 2 4- H ou r P er f . R e po r t = ==

> > Se l ec t R e gi s te r T yp e ? * US E R

LI N E

Note:
Type
T ype

Option
User, Line

120

1 3: 24 : 0 8 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


After pressing ENT ER from the above screen, the following screen (User and Line) will show
up.
User:
== = DS 3 /E 3 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = =

> > Se l ec t R e gi s te r T yp e ? * US E R
> > Se l ec t P a ra m et e r ? * L ES U A S

LI N E
S E FS

1 5 :4 0: 0 5 0 1 /1 7 /2 0 08

L CV

Note:
Type
User

Parameter
LES, UAS, SEFS, LCV

Default
LES

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor and TAB key to roll the desired options (LES, UAS, SEFS and LCV),
and the sample of LES screen is shown below.
= = = D S 3/ E 3 2 4- H ou r P er f . R e po r t = ==
1 5: 44 : 5 6 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8
S t a rt Ti m e = 1 1 :0 6 :2 3 0 1 /1 7 /2 0 08
U S E R L ES
- - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 5 1 2 s ec o nd s
- - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 8
(L E S) ( UA S ) ( SE F S) (L C V)
Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al
: 0
5 12
0
0
Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l
: 0
1 62 0 0 0
0
- - US E R, LE S , L as t 9 6 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv a l :
01 - 08 > 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
09 - 16 > 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
17 - 24 > 0
0
- -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 25 - 32 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 33 - 40 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 41 - 48 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 49 - 56 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 57 - 64 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 65 - 72 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 73 - 80 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 81 - 88 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 89 - 96 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - < < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > >
< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

121

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation


Line:
0 1 / 17 / 20 0 8

== = DS 3 /E 3 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = =

> > Se l ec t R e gi s te r T yp e ? US E R * LI N E
> > Se l ec t P a ra m et e r ? * L ES U A S
S E FS

1 5 :4 9: 3 6 0 1 /1 7 /2 0 08

L CV

Note:
Type
Line

Parameter
LES, UAS, SEFS, LCV

Default
LES

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor and TAB key to roll the desired options (LES, UAS, SEFS and LCV),
and the sample of LES screen is shown below.
= = = D S 3/ E 3 2 4- H ou r P er f . R e po r t = ==
1 5: 57 : 0 2 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8
S t a rt Ti m e = 1 1 :0 6 :2 3 0 1 /1 7 /2 0 08
L I N E L ES
- - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 3 3 8 s ec o nd s
- - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 9
(L E S) ( UA S ) ( SE F S) (L C V)
Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al
: 0
3 38
0
0
Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l
: 0
1 71 0 0 0
0
- - LI N E, LE S , L as t 9 6 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv a l :
01 - 08 > 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
09 - 16 > 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
17 - 24 > 0
0
0
- -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 25 - 32 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 33 - 40 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 41 - 48 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 49 - 56 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 57 - 64 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 65 - 72 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 73 - 80 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 81 - 88 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - 89 - 96 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - < < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > >
< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

122

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.5.8 Line Availability


The full path for Line Availability is as follows:
A > Line Availability
To display Line Availability, press A from the Controller Menu.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

The Line Availability menu will appear.


= == DS 3 /E 3 L i ne Av ai l a bi l it y = = =
St a rt Ti m e

1 5: 58 : 0 9 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8

: 11 : 06 : 23 01 / 17 / 20 08

- - Li n e A va i la b il i ty d u r in g L a st 24 - Ho u r:
Va l id Se c on d s
: 17 5 06 se c on d s
Av a il a bl e S e co n ds : 0 s ec o nd s
Un a va i la b le Se c on ds : 17 5 06 se c on d s
Li n e A va l ia b il i ty : 0. 0 %

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

123

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.5.9 Configuration
The full path for Configuration is as follows:
C > Configuration
To view the Unit Configuration, press C from the Port Menu.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

The Unit Configuration menu will appear.


= = = D S3 / E3 Sy s te m S e tu p = = =

1 6: 05 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8

C AR D T Y PE = D S3
T X- L EN G TH = 0 -2 25
X MT - AI S
= ON

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

124

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.5.10 Status
The full path for Status is as follows:
I > Status
To view the Unit Status, press I from the Port Menu.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

The Unit Status menu will appear.


= = = D S3 / E3 St at u s = = =
- - LI N E - LO S
:
XM T A I S :
BP V E R RO R
ES E R RO R

1 6: 09 : 5 3 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8

LOS
AIS
C O UN T : 0
C O UN T : 0

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

125

Chapter 5 Terminal Operation

5.5.11 Alarm History


The full path for Alarm History is as follows:
H > Alarm History
To view the Alarm History, press H from the Port Menu.
DS 3 /E 3 m en u

[ D I SP L AY ]
1 - > 1 -H o ur Pe r f. Re po r t
2 - > 2 4- H ou r P e rf . R ep o r t
A - > L in e A v ai l ab i li ty
C - > C on f ig u ra t io n
I - > S ta t us
H - > A la r m H is t or y

1 7: 11 : 2 8 0 1/ 1 6/ 2 00 8

[ SE TU P ]
S - > S y st e m S et u p
L - > L o op b ac k S e tu p
K - > C l ea r P e rf o rm a nc e D at a
M - > A l ar m S e tu p
X - > C l ea r A l ar m H i st o ry

[ L O G]
F - > L og Of f [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
O - > L og On [ S ET U P] ,[ M I SC ] M e nu
E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u

> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >

The Alarm History menu will appear.


L O C AL
[ A L AR M -T Y PE ]
LOS
LCV
LES
SEFS
UAS
B U N DL E S T AT U S
M A C C H AN G E

= = = D S3 / E3 Al a rm H i s to r y = ==
[T H RE SH O L D]
10 E- 5
1
1
1

[ CU R R- S TA T E]
A LM
OK
OK
OK
A LM
OK
OK

[ CO U NT ]
1
0
1
0
21
0
0

1 6: 12 : 4 1 0 1/ 1 7/ 2 00 8
[A L AR M ]
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR
MA J OR

< < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>

126

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6 FRONT PANEL OPERATION


The front panel LCD utilizes a 2-line by 16-character display and four keys labeled ESC, ENTER, left arrow '<',
and right arrow '>', as shown in Figure 5-1. The ENTER key is to enable a selection, while the left and right
arrow keys move the cursor to the left and right respectively. The ESC key returns to the next higher level of
selection or to the main menu without performing any operation. When the menu selected has no further
sub-menus, the current item selected is indicated by *.
NOTE: For each selection or change, ENTER key must be pressed to confirm.

Loop - IP
CONSOLE

TM

TDMoEthernet
ESC
D
C

10/100

LINK/ACT

LAN
WAN
LINK / ACT

B
ENTER

SNMP

POWER

ALM
10

/ 100

PORT

CONSOLE

D
LAN WAN

LINK/ACT

10/100

Loop-IP TM

LINK/ACT

ACO

TDMoEthernet

A
POWER

SNMP/ LAN2

ALM
10/100

Figure 6- 1 Front Panels

127

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


The entire LCD menu tree is shown below. By successively selecting the menu item at each level, the desired
operation or display can be obtained. Use left or right key to select the desired main menu branch and press
ENTER.
Main
Menu

Configuration

Bundle status

Bundle setup

System

Alarm

Information

Software
Version

Store Config

Alarm clock

Hardware
Version

Retrieve
Config

Alarm link

Serial
Number

Load Default

Source IP

Classifi pack RX

Ethernet

Source subnet

Byte received

Lan port

Gateway IP

Byte transmitted

Bun ACT Timer

Port select

Packet received

LPT Timer

Bundle ID

Packet transmitted

Alarm clock

Lan Rate

Action

LAN WAN SNMP

Alarm link

CAS Idle code

UDP number

Remote loss

Timeslot form

IP

Timeslot num

IP address

Destination IP

Subnet Mask

Cell in bundle

Gatway IP

Jitter delay

Date

Jitter size

Time

Vlan

SNMP

Vlan1 ID
Trap IP1

Device Name
Trap IP2
Console Port
Trap IP3
Baud Rate
Trap IP4
Data Length
Trap IP5

Alarm setup

Alarm status

Alarm clear

Vlan1 priority

Vlan2 ID

Vlan2 priority

Bundle status

Confirm?

Stop Bit
Community get

Parity
Community set

Figure 6- 2 LCD Menu Tree

128

Miscellaneous

System reset

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

E1

Conf setup

Port Status

Frame

LOF LOS

Code

RCV AIS
RCV RAI

CRC

XMT AIS
AMT RAI

RAI

BPV ES

Port Alarm

Port loopback

Clock Source

Local
Loopback

Master Clock

Alarm type

Remote
Loopback

Second
Clock

Threshold

Send Bert

Current Clock

Alarm setup

Port History

Bert Type

Recover
Clock

AIS

RAI

Bert Direct

Clock status

CAS

AIS

Timeslot from

OOS

LOS

Timeslot to

FDL

LOF

Sa-bit

BPV

IDLE

ES

UAS

CSS

BUNDLE

MAC

Alarm clear

Figure 6- 3 E1 LCD Menu Tree

129

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

T1

Conf setup

Port Status

Frame

LOF LOS

Code

RCV AIS
RCV RAI

CRC

XMT AIS
XMT RAI

RAI

BPV ES

Port Alarm

Port loopback

Clock Source

Local
Loopback

Master Clock

Alarm type

Remote
Loopback

Second
Clock

Threshold

Send Bert

Current Clock

Alarm setup

Port History

Bert Type

Recover
Clock

AIS

RAI

Bert Direct

Clock status

CAS

AIS

Timeslot from

OOS

LOS

Timeslot to

FDL

LOF

Sa_bit

BPV

IDLEEE

ES

UAS

CSS

BUNDLE

MAC

Alarm clear

Figure 6- 4 T1 LCD Menu Tree

130

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

DTE

Conf setup

Port Status

Port Alarm

Port loopback

Clock Source

Mode

Exist
RTS LOS

Rate

CLK LOS
DSR

Alarm type

Second
Clock

Tx clock

CTS
DCD

Threshold

Current Clock

Rx clock

DTR
RTS

Data

Alarm setup

Alarm History

Alarm clear

RTS

TTM

DCD

Figure 6- 5 DTE LCD Menu Tree

131

Local
Loopback

Master Clock

Recover
Clock
Clock status

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.1 Configuration
Configuration group includes System and Console Port menus.

IP-6700
System

6.1.1

System

Press ENTER from the above menu to enter into the System menu, which includes Ethernet, Lan port, Bun
ACT Timer, LPT Timer Lan Rate, CAS Idle code, Remote loss, IP, Date, Time, and SNMP submenus.

System
Configuration

6.1.1.1

Ethernet

Presses ENTER from the System menu. Use arrow keys to select ENABLE or DISABLE, then press ENTER.
Please refer to the 6.1.7 for detail information.

System
Ethernet

Ethernet
ENABLE

Ethernet
DISABLE

6.1.1.2

Lan Port

Press ENTER from the System menu. Use arrow keys to select Lan Port, then press ENTER. Please refer to
the 6.1.1.1 for detail information.

System
Lan Port

Lan Port
Data_only

Data_only
D+S S-on

132

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Data_only
D+S S-off

6.1.1.3

Bun ACT Timer

Press ENTER from the System menu. Use arrow keys to select Bun ACT Timer, then press ENTER. Bun ACT
Timer is used t setup the regular time to do activation. When the local side sets up a bundle, a signal is sent to
see if the remote side is online or not. When the local side and the Remote side are both on line, the activation
can be done.

System
Bun ACT Timer

Bun ACT Timer


1-9999(number)

6.1.1.4

LPT Timer

Press ENTER from the System menu. Use arrow keys to select LPT Timer, then press ENTER. When remote
side through FDL ask to do Loopback, Local side will do time setup. After time setup it will cancel Loopback
automatically.

System
LPT Timer

LPT Timer
1-9999(number)

6.1.1.5

Lan Rate

Press ENTER from the System menu. Use arrow keys to select Lan Rate, then press ENTER. The speed of
LAN+WAN is 100M. The user can setup the speed of LAN in order to keep the WAN rate.

System
Lan Rate

Lan Rate
1-9999(number)

133

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.1.1.6

CAS Idle code

Press ENTER from the System menu. Use arrow keys to select CAS Idle code, then press ENTER. The code
of CAS Rate can choose the number form 1 to 15.

System
CAS Idle code

Lan Rate
1-15(number)

6.1.1.7

Remote loss

Press ENTER from the System menu. Use arrow keys to select Remote loss, then press ENTER. When the
user cannot receive bundle packet from others, it will still send users bundle packet. After the user presses the
stop, the user will not send any information to others. In addition, the user will stop send information to others.

System
Remote loss

Remote loss
continue

Remote loss
stop

6.1.1.8

IP

The IP menu allows modification of device IP address, IP address for Subnet Mask and Gateway, and IP
interface. Each IP address can be modified by moving the cursor to the desired position and selecting a
number. After making all changes, select YES to save the changes.

System
IP

IP Address
000.000.000.000

Subnet Mask
000.000.000.000

134

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Gateway IP
000.000.000.000

6.1.1.9

Date

Press ENTER from the System menu. Use arrow keys to select Date, then press ENTER. This is used to setup
the system data.

System
Date

Date
Month/day/year

6.1.1.10

Time

This menu is used to setup the system time.

System
Time

Time
Hour/min/sec

6.1.1.11

SNMP

This menu is used to select SNMP. Under Main menu, use left or right key to select SNMP menu. Under SNMP
sub-menu, use arrow keys to select a desired option
Its sub-menus include these options: Trap IP1, Trap IP2, TrapIP3, Trap IP4, Trap IP5, Community get and
Community set.

System
SNMP

SNMP
Trap IP1

Trap IP1
000.000.000.000

135

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Trap IP2
000.000.000.000

Trap IP3
000.000.000.000

Trap IP4
000.000.000.000

Trap IP5
000.000.000.000

Community get
XXXXX(test)

Community set
XXXXX(test)

6.1.1.12

Device Name

This menu is used to setup the Device Name.

System
Device Name
To rename the device name, use arrow keys to select a desired number or character, press ENTER. Then
move the cursor at OK, press ENTER to enable the device name.

Device Name
XXXXX(test)

136

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.2 Bundle Setup


The menus are used to configure console port to select Source IP, Source subnet, Gateway IP, Port select,
Bundle ID, Action, UDP number, Timeslot from, Timeslot num, Destination IP, Cell in bundle, Jitter delay, Jitter
size, Vlan, Vlan1 ID, Vlan1 priority, Vlan2 ID, Vlan2 priority, Bundle status, and Confirm. Under Bundle setup
menu, use left or right key to select Console Port menu. Press ENTER to enter into its submenus.

Configuration
Bundle Setup

6.2.1

Source IP

Under IP menu, move the cursor to the Source-IP option; the system will show Source IP Address as below.

Bundle Setup
Source IP

Source IP
000.000.000.000

6.2.2

Source subnet

Under IP menu, move the cursor to the Source-subnet option; the system will show Source Subnet Address as
below.

Bundle Setup
Source subnet

Source subnet
000.000.000.000

6.2.3

Gateway IP

If source IP and destination IP are not in a LAN the user must setup the LAN router address to the Getway IP.

Bundle Setup
Gateway IP

Gateway IP
000.000.000.000

137

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.2.4

Port Select

Under Port Select menu, the user can select what port they want to setup.

Bundle Setup
Port select

Port select
PORT-A

Port select
PORT-B

Port select
PORT-C

Port select
PORT-D

6.2.5

Bundle ID

Move the cursor to select Bundle ID, press ENTER. Please refer to 6.1.2.2 (table of Maximum Bundle
Allocation) for detail information.

Bundle Setup
Bundle ID

Bundle ID
1-31(number)

6.2.6

Action

The Action has two options, Add bundle and Delete bundle. Move the cursor to select action, press ENTER.

Bundle Setup
Action

Action
Add bundle

138

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Action
Delete bundle

Action
Delete all

Action
Active all

Action
Change bundle

Action
Stop Tx bundle

6.2.7

UDP number

There are 4 ports to have UDP number from 1 to 8063. If one port gets UDP number such as 100, another port
cannot use same UDP number (refer to Figure 6-1 for detail). Move the cursor to select UDP number, press
ENTER.

Bundle Setup
UDP number

UDP number
1-8063(number)

6.2.8

Timeslot from

To modify the Timeslot from, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Setup
Timeslot from

Timeslot from
1-31(number)

139

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.2.9

Timeslot num

To modify the Timeslot num, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Setup
Timeslot num

Timeslot num
1-31(number)

6.2.10 Destination IP
The Destination Address field identifies the station or stations that are to receive the packet. The Source
Address identifies the station that originated the packet. A Destination Address may specify either an
"individual address" destined for a single station, or a "multicast address" destined for a group of stations. A
Destination Address of all 1 bits refers to all stations on the LAN and is called a "broadcast address". Move the
cursor to select Destination IP, press ENTER.

Bundle Setup
Destination IP

Destination IP
000.000.000.000

6.2.11 Cell in bundle


In one bundle, how many cell will include (refer to Figure 8-5 for detail). Move the cursor to select Cell in
bundle, press ENTER.

Bundle Setup
Cell in bundle

Cell in bundle
1-31(number)

6.2.12 Jitter delay


Move the cursor to select Jitter delay, press ENTER. The number is from 1 to 512. Total delay buffer n 0.5 ms
max.

Bundle Setup
Jitter delay

140

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Jitter delay
1-512(number)

6.2.13 Jitter size


Move the cursor to select Jitter size, the number is from 1-512, press ENTER. Packet delay cannot n x 0.5
ms.

Bundle Setup
Jitter size

Jitter size
1-512(number)

6.2.14 Vlan
Move the cursor to select Current Vlan press ENTER. Under Vlan sub-menu, use arrow keys to select a
desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: OFF, 1-VLAN and 2-VLAN

Bundle Setup
Vlan

Vlan
OFF

Vlan
1-VLAN

Vlan
2-VLAN

6.2.15 Vlan1 ID
To modify the Vlan1 ID, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Setup
Vlan1 ID

141

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Vlan1 ID
1-4095(number)

6.2.16 Vlan1 priority


To modify the Vlan1 priority, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Setup
Vlan1 priority

Vlan1 priority
1-7(number)

6.2.17 Vlan2 ID
To modify the Vlan2 ID, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Setup
Vlan2 ID

Vlan2 ID
1-4095(number)

6.2.18 Vlan2 priority


To modify the Vlan2 priority, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Setup
Vlan2 priority

Vlan2 priority
1-7(number)

6.2.19 Bundle status


Bundle status menu shows the current parity selection of Deactive, NONE, or Active. To active or deactive
Bundle status, move cursor to a desired selection and press ENTER.

Bundle Setup
Bundle status

142

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Bundle status
Deactive

Bundle status
NONE

Bundle status
Active

6.2.20 Confirm?
Move the cursor to confirm, press ENTER. Move the cursor to NO or YES to confirm the Bundle setup.

Bundle Setup
Confirm?

Confirm?
No

Confirm?
YES

6.3 Bundle Status


The menus are used to configure Bundle status to select Classifi pack RX, Byte received, Byte transmitted,
Packet received, Packet transmitted and LAN WAN SNMP. Under Bundle status menu, use left or right key to
select Console Port menu. Press ENTER to enter into its submenus.

Configuration
Bundle Status

6.3.1

Classifi pack RX

To modify the Classifi pack RX, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Status
Classifi pack RX

143

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Classifi pack RX
0(number)

6.3.2

Byte received

To modify the Byte received, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Status
Byte received

Byte received
0(number)

6.3.3

Byte transmitted

To modify the Byte transmitted, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Status
Byte transmitted

Byte transmitted
0(number)

6.3.4

Packet received

To modify the Packet received, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Status
Packet received

Packet received
0(number)

6.3.5

Packet transmitted

To modify the Packet transmitted, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Bundle Status
Packet transmitted

144

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Packet transmitted
0(number)

6.3.6

LAN WAN SNMP

Move the cursor to select LAN WAN SNMP, press ENTER.

Bundle Status
LAN WAN SNMP

LAN WAN SNMP


Down Down UP

6.4 Alarm
The menus are used to select Alarm in order to setup alarm, clear alarm and to clear alarm. Under Alarm
menu, use left or right key to select Console Port menu. Press ENTER to enter into its submenus.

Configuration
Alarm

6.4.1

Alarm setup

Move the cursor to NEXT or PREV to view alarm, then go to EDIT option with pressing ENTER to do alarm
setup.

Alarm
Alarm setup

6.4.1.1

Alarm clock

The setup menu is used to setup clock alarm. The clock alarm occur when the clock source change.

Alarm setup
Alarm clock

Alarm clock
DISABLE

145

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Alarm clock
MAJOR

Alarm clock
CRITICAL

Alarm clock
MINOR

6.4.1.2

Alarm link

Press ENTER from the Alarm link menu. Use arrow keys to select alarm link, then press ENTER.
Their submenu includes these options: DISABLE, MAJOR< CRITICAL and MINOR.

Alarm setup
Alarm link

Alarm link
DISABLE

Alarm link
MAJOR

Alarm link
CRITICAL

Alarm link
MINOR

6.4.2

Alarm status

Move the cursor to select alarm status, press ENTER. Move the cursor to NO or YES to confirm the alarm
status.

Alarm
Alarm status

CLOCK LINK
NO
YES
146

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.4.3

Alarm clear

Pressing enter when cursor is on NEXT will move to the next alarm item. To confirm the existing option, move
cursor to EDIT and press ENTER. Then move cursor to the desired option and press ENTER.
The alarm queue can be cleared.

Alarm
Alarm clear

Alarm clear
Confirm?

6.5 Information
The menus are used to select Software version, Hardware version and Serial number. Under Information
menu, use left or right key to select Console Port menu. Press ENTER to enter into its submenus.

Configuration
Information

6.5.1

Software Version

Move the cursor to select Software Version, press ENTER.

Information
Software Version

Software Version
xxxx(text)

6.5.2

Hardware Version

To modify the Hardware version, first move the cursor to the text to be modified. Press enter.

Information
Hardware Version

Hardware Version
xxxx(text)

147

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.5.3

Serial number

To modify the Serial number, first move the cursor to the text to be modified. Press enter.

Information
Serial number

Serial number
xxxx(text)

6.6 Miscellaneous
The Miscellaneous group includes: Store Config, Retrieve Config, Load Default, and System reset.

Configuration
Miscellaneous

6.6.1

Store Config

Pressing enter when cursor is on NEXT will move to the next Store Config item. To confirm the existing option,
press ENTER.

Miscellaneous
Store Config

Store Config
Confirm?

6.6.2

Retrieve Config

Pressing enter when cursor is on NEXT will move to the next Retrieve Config item. To confirm the existing
option, press ENTER

Miscellaneous
Retrieve Config

Retrieve Config
Confirm?

148

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.6.3

Load Default

Pressing enter when cursor is on NEXT will move to the next Load Default item. To confirm the existing option,
press ENTER. Note: Load Default will causes reboot.

Miscellaneous
Load Default

Load Default
Confirm?

6.6.4

System reset

Pressing enter when cursor is on NEXT will move to the next System reset item. To confirm the existing option,
press ENTER.

Miscellaneous
System reset

System reset
Confirm?

149

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.7 E1-CARD Menu


Config setup includes Frame, Code, CRC, RAI, CIS, CAS, OOS, FDL, Sa_bit and IDLE menus.

IP6700
E1-CARD PORT B

6.7.1

Config Setup

Move the cursor to select Config Setup, press ENTER.

E1-CARD PORT B
Config Setup

6.7.1.1

Frame

Move the cursor to select Frame, press ENTER. To enable it, move the cursor to ON and press ENTER. To
disable it, move the cursor to OFF and press ENTER.

Config Setup
Frame

Frame
OFF

Frame
ON

6.7.1.2

Code

To select the coding scheme, use the arrow keys cycle through to a proper selection and press ENTER. The
choices for E1 are AMI and HDB3. Using the arrow keys to change the setting, and press ENTER. Be sure that
this setting matches that of the network.

Config Setup
Code

Code
AMI

Code
HDB3

150

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.7.1.3

CRC

The cyclic redundancy check function can be turned on or off. Unlike bipolar violation, which can monitor only
one span, CRC menu allows error monitoring through multiple spans of E1 line. For two frame mode, set CRC
to OFF. For multi-frame mode, set CRC to ON.

Config Setup
CRC

CRC
ON

CRC
OFF

6.7.1.4

RAI

Remote Alarm Indication, transmits a return signal back out to indicate loss of signal and loss of frame sync at
the receiving side if the port. This action can be turned ON or OFF.
Use arrow keys to select ON or OFF, then press ENTER to enable or disable the option.

Config Setup
RAI

RAI
ON

RAI
OFF
6.7.1.5

AIS

Under CIS submenu, use arrow keys to select ON or OFF, then press ENTER to enable or disable the option.

Config Setup
AIS

AIS
ON

AIS
OFF

151

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.7.1.6

CAS

Signaling is either CAS (channel associated signalling) or out-of-band such as CCIS (common channel
interoffice signalling). To change the signaling type, use the arrow keys to choose from CAS ON or CAS OFF
and press ENTER.

Config Setup
CAS

CAS
OFF

CAS
ON

6.7.1.7

OOS

To change the OOS protocol, use the arrow keys to cycle through to the proper selection and Press ENTER.

Config Setup
OOS

OOS
BUSY

OOS
IDLE

OOS
BUSY_IDLE

OOS
IDLE_BUSY

6.7.1.8

FDL

FDL menu shows the facility data link. Move the cursor at a desired option, press ENTER to confirm it.

Config Setup
FDL

152

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

FDL
OFF

FDL
FDL

FDL
HDLC

6.7.1.9

Sa_bit

To change a channel for FDL, move cursor to Sabit, and use left or right arrow keys to select a channel, press
ENTER.

Config Setup
Sa_bit

Sa_bit
Sa4

Sa_bit
Sa5

Sa_bit
Sa6

Sa_bit
Sa7

Sa_bit
Sa8

Sa_bit
Sa4+Sa5

153

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.7.1.10

IDLE

Press ENTER for the Line Idle Code menu. The user can enter number from 0-255 to the Idle menu.

Config Setup
IDLE

IDLE
0-255(number)

6.7.2

Port Status

Under the E1 card menu, move the cursor to Port Status option, then the system will show as below.

E1-CARD PORT B
Port Status

6.7.2.1

LOF LOS

Under Port Status menu to select LOF LOS, and move the cursor to NO to setup LOF LOS then press ENTER.

Port Status
LOF LOS

LOF LOS
NO No

6.7.2.2

RCV AIS RCV RAI

Under Port Status menu to select RCV AIS RCV RAI, press ENTER, move the cursor to NO to setup RCV AIS
RCV RAI, then press ENTER.

Port Status
RCV AIS RCV RAI

RCV AIS RCV RAI


NO NO

154

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.7.2.3

XMT AIS XMT RAI

Under Port Status menu to select XMT AIS XMT RAI, press ENTER, move the cursor to NO to setup XMT AIS
XMT RAI, then press ENTER.

Port Status
XMT AIS XMT RAI

XMT AIS XMT RAI


NO No

6.7.2.4

BPV ES

To setup the BPV ES, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Port Status
BPV ES

BPV ES
000 000

6.7.3

Port Alarm

Move the cursor to select Port Alarm, press ENTER.

E1-CARD PORT B
Port Alarm

6.7.3.1

Alarm Setup

Move the cursor to NEXT or PREV to view alarm, then go to EDIT option with pressing ENTER to do alarm
setup.

Port Alarm
Alarm Setup

6.7.3.1.1

Alarm Type

Move the cursor to select Alarm Type, press ENTER. The alarm types include RAI, AIS, LOS, LOF, BPV, ES,
UAS, CSS, BUNDEL and MAC.

Port Alarm
Alarm setup

155

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Alarm setup
Alarm Type

E1 RAI
CRITI

E1 RAI
MINOR

E1 RAI
DIS

E1 RAI
MAJOR

6.7.3.1.2

Threshold

Move the cursor to select Current Threshold press ENTER. Under Threshold sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: E1 BPV, E1 ES, E1 UAS, and E1 CSS. Then move the cursor to the
digit to be modified.

Port Alarm
Alarm setup

Alarm setup
Threshold

E1 BPV
1-9

E1 ES
1-65535

E1 UAS
1-65535

156

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

E1 CSS
1-65535

6.7.3.2

Port History

Move the cursor to select Current Port History, press ENTER. Under Port History sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: RAI, AIS, LOS, LOF, BPV, ES, UAS, CSS, BUNDLE and MAC.

Port Alarm
Port History

6.7.3.2.1

RAI

Move the cursor to select RAI, press ENTER.


Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the RAI alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
RAI

RAI
CRITI OK 0000

6.7.3.2.2

AIS

AIS menu shows the configuration set for the alarm indication signal. Move the cursor to select AIS, press
ENTER.
Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the AIS alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
AIS

AIS
CRITI OK 0000

157

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.7.3.2.3

LOS

Move the cursor to select LOS, press ENTER.


Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the LOS alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
LOS

LOS
CRITI OK 0000

6.7.3.2.4

LOF

Move the cursor to select LOF, press ENTER.


Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the LOF alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
LOF

LOF
CRITI OK 0000

6.7.3.2.5

BPV

Move the cursor to select BPV, press ENTER.


Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the ES alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, the LCD screen will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
BPV

BPV
CRITI OK 0000

158

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.7.3.2.6

ES

Move the cursor to select ES, press ENTER.


Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the ES alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, the LCD screen will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
ES

ES
CRITI OK 0000

6.7.3.2.7

UAS

Move the cursor to select UAS, press ENTER.


Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the UAS alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, the LCD screen will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
UAS

UAS
CRITI OK 0000

6.7.3.2.8

CSS

Move the cursor to select CSS, press ENTER.


Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the CSS alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, the LCD screen will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
CSS

CSS
CRITI OK 0000

159

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.7.3.2.9

BUNDLE

Move the cursor to select BUNDLE, press ENTER.


Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the BUNDLE alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, the LCD screen will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
BUNDLE

BUNDLE
CRITI OK 0000

6.7.3.2.10

MAC

Move the cursor to select MAC, press ENTER.


Note: 1. CRITI is Critical
2. If the MAC alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, the LCD screen will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
MAC

MAC
CRITI OK 0000

6.7.3.3

Alarm Clear

Pressing enter when cursor is on NEXT will move to the next alarm item. To confirm the existing option, move
cursor to EDIT and press ENTER. Then move cursor to the desired option and press ENTER.
The alarm queue can be cleared.

Port Alarm
Alarm Clear

Alarm Clear
Confirm?

160

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.7.4

Port Loopback

Move the cursor to select Port Loopback, press ENTER.

E1-CARD PORT B
Port Loopback

6.7.4.1

Local Loopback

Move the cursor to select Current Local Loopback press ENTER. Under Local Loopback sub-menu, use arrow
keys to select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: OFF, LOCAL, PLB and LLB.

Port Loopback
Local Loopback

Local Loopback
OFF

Local Loopback
LOCAL

Local Loopback
PLB

Local Loopback
LLB

6.7.4.2

Remote Loopback

E1 remote loopback is used to activate E1 line remote loopback test. To activate or deactivate E1 remote
loopback, use left or right arrow keys cycle through to a desired selection and press ENTER.

Port Loopback
Remote Loopback

Remote Loopback
Active

Remote Loopback
Deactive
161

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.7.4.3

Send Bert

Move the cursor to select Send Bert, press ENTER.

Port Loopback
Send Bert

6.7.4.3.1

Bert Type

Move the cursor to select Current Bert Type press ENTER. Under Bert Type sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: OFF, PRBS_FULL and N*64K.

Send Bert
Bert Type

Bert Type
OFF

Bert Type
PRBS_FULL

Bert Type
N*64K

6.7.4.3.2

Bert Direct

Move the cursor to select Bert Direct, press ENTER. Its sub-menus include these options: LINE and PCM. The
user can send their packet to LINE or to PCM side.

Send Bert
Bert Direct

Bert Direct
LINE

Bert Direct
PCM

162

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.7.4.3.3

Timeslot from

To modify the Timeslot from, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Send Bert
Timeslot from

Timeslot from
1-32

6.7.4.3.4

Timeslot to

To modify the Timeslot to, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Send Bert
Timeslot to

Timeslot to
1-32

6.7.5

Clock Source

Move the cursor to select Clock Source, press ENTER.

E1-CARD PORT B
Clock Source

6.7.5.1

Master Clock

The IP6700 provide operator to setup each ports clock source from internal, external, line (from A/B/C/D), or
WAN (from A/B/C/D). Move the cursor to select Master Clock press ENTER. Please refer to 6.1.5 for detail
information.

Clock Source
Master Clock

Master Clock
INTERNAL

Master Clock
EXTERNAL
163

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Master Clock
PORT A (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT B (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT C (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT D (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT A (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT B (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT C (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT D (BUNDLE 0)

6.7.5.2

Second Clock

The IP6700 provide operator to setup each ports clock source from internal, external, line (from A/B/C/D), or
WAN (from A/B/C/D). Move the cursor to Second Clock, press ENTER. Please refer to 6.1.5 for detail
information.

Clock Source
Second Clock

Second Clock
INTERNAL

164

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Second Clock
EXTERNAL

Second Clock
PORT A (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT B (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT C (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT D (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT A (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT B (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT C (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT D (BUNDLE 0)

6.7.5.3

Current Clock

Move the cursor to select Current Clock, press ENTER. Please refer to 6.1.5 for detail information.

Clock Source
Current Clock

Current Clock
MASTER_CLK

165

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Current Clock
SECOND_CLK

Current Clock
INTERNAL

6.7.5.4

Recover Clock

Move the cursor to select Recover Clock, press ENTER. Please refer to 6.1.5 for detail information.

Clock Source
Recover Clock

Recover Clock
AUTOMATIC

Recover Clock
MANUAL

6.7.5.5

Clock status

Move the cursor to select Clock status, press ENTER. Please refer to 6.1.5 for detail information.

Clock Source
Clock status

Clock status
NORMAL

166

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.8 T1-CARD Menu


Config setup includes Frame, Code, YEL, AIS, CAS, OOS, INBAND, IDLE, INTE, LBO and FDL menus.

IP6700
T1-CARD PORT C

6.8.1

Config Setup

Move the cursor to select Config Setup, press ENTER.

T1-CARD PORT C
Config Setup

6.8.1.1

Frame

Move the cursor to select Frame, press ENTER. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*). To
enable it, move the cursor to ON and press ENTER. To disable it, move the cursor to OFF and press ENTER.

Config Setup
Frame

Frame
*OFF

Frame
ON

6.8.1.2

Code

To select the coding scheme, use the arrow keys cycle through to a proper selection and press ENTER. The
choices for T1 are AMI and HDB3. An asterisk (*) is placed by the currently selected item. Using the arrow keys
to change the setting, and press ENTER. Be sure that this setting matches that of the network.

Config Setup
Code

Code
*HDB3

Code
AMI

167

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.8.1.3

CRC

For two frame mode, set CRC to OFF. For multiframe mode, set CRC to ON. Move the cursor to select CRC,
press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Config Setup
CRC

CRC
*ON

CRC
OFF

6.8.1.4

RAI

Use arrow keys to select ON or OFF, then press ENTER to enable or disable the option. The current selection
will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Config Setup
RAI

RAI
*ON

RAI
OFF

6.8.1.5

AIS

Move the cursor to select AIS, press ENTER. To enable it, move the cursor to ON and press ENTER. To
disable it, move the cursor to OFF and press ENTER.

Config Setup
AIS

AIS
*ON

AIS
OFF

168

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.8.1.6

CAS

Signaling is either CAS (channel associated signalling) or out-of-band such as CCIS (common channel
interoffice signalling). To change the signaling type, use the arrow keys to choose from CAS ON or CAS OFF
and press ENTER.

Config Setup
CAS

CAS
*ON

CAS
OFF

6.8.1.7

OOS

To change the OOS protocol, use the arrow keys to cycle through to the proper selection and Press ENTER.

Config Setup
OOS

OOS
*BUSY

OOS
IDLE

OOS
BUSY_IDLE

OOS
IDLE_BUSY

169

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.8.1.8

FDL

FDL menu shows the facility data link. To enable FDL by moving cursor to ON, while to disable it by moving
cursor to OFF, and press ENTER. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk "*".

Config Setup
FDL

FDL
*ON

FDL
OFF

FDL
HDLC

6.8.1.9

Sa_bit

To change a channel for FDL, move cursor to Sa_bit, and use left or right arrow keys to select a channel, press
ENTER. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Config Setup
Sa_bit

Sa_bit
*Sa4

Sa_bit
Sa5

Sa_bit
Sa6

Sa_bit
Sa7

Sa_bit
Sa8
170

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Sa_bit
Sa4+Sa5

6.8.1.10

IDLE

Press ENTER for the Line Idle Code menu.


The Idle menu shows the transmission idle code when a DS0 time slot is in idle mode. To change the idle code,
press ENTER to cycle through the selections. This operation must be concluded by moving the arrow keys to
YES position and pressing ENTER to enable the changes.

Config Setup
IDLE

IDLE OK
*000 (0-255)

6.8.2

Port Status

Move the cursor to select Port Status, press ENTER.

T1-CARD PORT C
Port Status

6.8.2.1

LOF LOS

Under Port Status menu to select LOF LOS, and move the cursor to NO or YES to setup LOF LOS then press
ENTER.

Port Status
LOF LOS

LOF LOS
NO YES

6.8.2.2

RCV AIS RCV RAI

Under Port Status menu to select RCV AIS RCV RAI, and move the cursor to NO to setup RCV AIS RCV RAI
then press ENTER.

Port Status
RCV AIS RCV RAI

171

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

RCV AIS RCV RAI


NO NO

6.8.2.3

XMT AIS XMT RAI

Under Port Status menu to select XMT AIS AMT RAI, and move the cursor to NO to setup XMT AIS AMT RAI
then press ENTER.

Port Status
XMT AIS XMT RAI

XMT AIS XMT RAI


NO No

6.8.2.4

BPV ES

To setup the BPV ES, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Port Status
BPV ES

BPV ES
000 000

6.8.3

Port Alarm

Move the cursor to select Port Alarm, press ENTER.

T1-CARD PORT C
Port Alarm

6.8.3.1

Alarm Setup

Move the cursor to select Alarm Setup, press ENTER.

Port Alarm
Alarm Setup

172

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.8.3.1.1

Alarm Type

Move the cursor to select Alarm Type, press ENTER. The alarm types include YEL, AIS, LOS, LOF, BPV, ES,
UAS, CSS, BUNDLE and MAC. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Port Alarm
Alarm setup

Alarm setup
Alarm Type

T1 YEL
*MAJOR

T1 YEL
CRITI

T1 YEL
MINOR

T1 YEL
DIS

6.8.3.1.2

Threshold

Move the cursor to select Current Threshold press ENTER. Under Threshold sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: T1 BPV, T1 ES, T1 UAS, and T1 CSS. Then move the cursor to the
digit to be modified.

Port Alarm
Alarm setup

Alarm setup
Threshold

T1 BPV OK
*5 (1-9)

173

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

T1 ES OK
*0001 (1-65535)

T1 UAS OK
*00001 (1-65535)

T1 CSS OK
*00001 (1-65535)

6.8.3.2

Port History

Move the cursor to select Current Port History, press ENTER. Under Port History sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option. The menu is used to show the Alarm History.
Their submenu includes these options: RAI, AIS, LOS, LOF, BPV, ES, UAS, CSS, BUNDLE and MAC.

Port Alarm
Port History

6.8.3.2.1

RAI

Move the cursor to select RAI, press ENTER. The menu shows the RAI alarm status.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the RAI alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B RAI

PORT B RAI
MAJOR OK 0000

6.8.3.2.2

AIS

AIS menu shows the configuration set for the alarm indication signal. Move the cursor to select AIS, press
ENTER.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the AIS alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B AIS
174

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

PORT B AIS
MAJOR OK 0000

6.8.3.2.3

LOS

Move the cursor to select LOS, press ENTER. The menu shows the LOS alarm status.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the LOS alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B LOS

PORT B LOS
MAJOR OK 0000

6.8.3.2.4

LOF

Move the cursor to select LOF, press ENTER. The menu shows the LOF alarm status.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the LOF alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B LOF

PORT B LOF
MAJOR OK 0000

6.8.3.2.5
BPV
Move the cursor to select BPV, press ENTER. The menu shows the BPV alarm status.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the BPV alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B BPV

PORT B BPV
MAJOR OK 0000

175

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.8.3.2.6

ES

Move the cursor to select ES, press ENTER. The menu shows the ES alarm status.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the ES alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B ES

PORT B ES
MAJOR OK 0000

6.8.3.2.7

UAS

Move the cursor to select UAS, press ENTER. The menu shows the UAS alarm status.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the UAS alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B UAS

PORT B UAS
MAJOR OK 0000

6.8.3.2.8

CSS

Move the cursor to select CSS, press ENTER. The menu shows the CSS alarm status.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the CSS alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B CSS

PORT B CSS
MAJOR OK 0000

176

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.8.3.2.9

BUNDLE

Move the cursor to select BUNDLE, press ENTER. The menu shows the BUNDLE alarm status.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the BUNDLE alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B BUNDLE

PORT B BUNDLE
MAJOR OK 0000

6.8.3.2.10

MAC

Move the cursor to select MAC, press ENTER. The menu shows the MAC alarm status.
Note: 1. MAJOR is Alarm Type
2. If the MAC alarm has ever happened, it will show alm. If it is not, will show OK.
3. 0000 shows how many times have it ever happened?

Port History
PORT B MAC

PORT B MAC
MAJOR OK 0000

6.8.3.3

Alarm Clear

Pressing enter when cursor is on NEXT will move to the next alarm item. To confirm the existing option, move
cursor to EDIT and press ENTER. Then move cursor to the desired option and press ENTER.
The alarm queue can be cleared.

Port Alarm
Alarm Clear

Alarm Clear
Confirm?

177

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.8.4

Port Loopback

Move the cursor to select Port Loopback, press ENTER.

T1-CARD PORT C
Port Loopback

6.8.4.1

Local Loopback

Move the cursor to select Current Local Loopback press ENTER. Under Local Loopback sub-menu, use arrow
keys to select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: OFF, LOCAL, PLB and LLB. . The current selection is highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

Port Loopback
Local Loopback

Local Loopback
*OFF

Local Loopback
LOCAL

Local Loopback
PLB

Local Loopback
LLB

6.8.4.2

Remote Loopback

T1 remote loopback is used to activate T1 line remote loopback test. To activate or deactivate T1 remote
loopback, use left or right arrow keys cycle through to a desired selection and press ENTER. The current
selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Port Loopback
Remote Loopback

Remote Loopback
*ACTIVE-IN-BAND

178

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Remote Loopback
ACTIVE-AT&T-P

Remote Loopback
ACTIVE-ANSI-P

Remote Loopback
ACTIVE-ANSI-L

Remote Loopback
DEACTIVE-IN-BAN

Remote Loopback
DEACTIVE-AT&T-P

Remote Loopback
DEACTIVE-ANSI-P

Remote Loopback
DEACTIVE-ANSI-L

6.8.4.3

Send Bert

Move the cursor to select Send Bert, press ENTER.

Port Loopback
Send Bert

6.8.4.3.1

Bert Type

Move the cursor to select Current Bert Type press ENTER. Under Bert Type sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: OFF, PRBS_FULL and N*64K. The current selection is highlighted by
an asterisk (*).

Send Bert
Bert Type

179

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Bert Type
*OFF

Bert Type
PRBS_FULL

Bert Type
N*64K

6.8.4.3.2
Bert Direct
Move the cursor to select Bert Direct, press ENTER. Its sub-menus include these options: LINE and PCM. The
current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Send Bert
Bert Direct

Bert Direct
*LINE

Bert Direct
PCM

6.8.4.3.3
Timeslot from
To modify the Timeslot from, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter. The current selection
is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Send Bert
Timeslot from OK

Timeslot from OK
*01 (1-24)

180

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.8.4.3.4
Timeslot to
To modify the Timeslot to, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Send Bert
Timeslot to OK

Timeslot to OK
*01 (1-24)

6.8.5

Clock Source

Move the cursor to select Clock Source, press ENTER.

T1-CARD PORT C
Clock Source

6.8.5.1

Master Clock

The IP6700 provide operator to setup each ports clock source from internal, external, line (from A/B/C/D), or
WAN (from A/B/C/D). Move the cursor to select Master Clock, press ENTER. The current selection is
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Clock Source
Master Clock

Master Clock
*INTERNAL

Master Clock
EXTERNAL

Master Clock
PORT A (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT B (LINE)

181

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Master Clock
PORT C (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT D (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT A (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT B (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT C (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT D (BUNDLE 0)

6.8.5.2

Second Clock

The IP6700 provide operator to setup each ports clock source from internal, external, line (from A/B/C/D), or
WAN (from A/B/C/D). Move the cursor to Second Clock, press ENTER. The current selection is highlighted by
an asterisk (*).

Clock Source
Second Clock

Second Clock
*INTERNAL

Second Clock
EXTERNAL

Second Clock
PORT A (LINE)

182

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Second Clock
PORT B (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT C (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT D (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT A (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT B (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT C (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT D (BUNDLE 0)

6.8.5.3

Current Clock

Move the cursor to select Current Clock, press ENTER. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Clock Source
Current Clock

Current Clock
*MASTER_CLK

Current Clock
SECOND_CLK

Current Clock
INTERNAL

183

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.8.5.4

Recover Clock

Move the cursor to select Current Clock press ENTER. Under Recover clock sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: MANUAL and AUTOMATIC
The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Clock Source
Recover Clock

Recover Clock
*AUTOMATIC

Recover Clock
MANUAL

6.8.5.5

Clock status

Move the cursor to select Clock status, press ENTER.

Clock Source
Clock status

Clock status
NORMAL

184

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.9 DTE Menu


Config setup includes Mode, Rate, Tx clock, Rx clock, Data, RTS, TTM and DCD menus.

IP6700
V35-CARD PORT D

6.9.1

Config Setup

Move the cursor to select Config Setup, press ENTER.

V35-CARD PORT D
Config Setup

6.9.1.1

Mode

The Mode menu shows the current Mode is either FULL or 64 Kbps. To change the Mode data rate, move
cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Config Setup
Mode

Mode
*FULL

Mode
N*64K

6.9.1.2

Rate

The Rate menu shows the current DTE data rate is either 64 or 56 Kbps. To change the DTE data rate, move
cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Config Setup
Rate

Rate
*56KBps

Rate
64KBps

185

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.9.1.3

Tx clock

The Data menu shows the current DTE Tx clock polarity (either normal or inverted) by placing an asterisk (*) at
the appropriate selection. To change the DTE Tx clock polarity, move cursor to the desired selection and press
ENTER.

Config Setup
Tx clock

Tx clock
*Normal

Tx clock
Inverted

6.9.1.4

Rx clock

The Data menu shows the current DTE Rx clock polarity (either normal or inverted) by placing an asterisk (*) at
the appropriate selection. To change the DTE Rx clock polarity, move cursor to the desired selection and press
ENTER.

Config Setup
Rx clock

Rx clock
*Normal

Rx clock
Inverted

6.9.1.5

DATA

The Data menu shows the current DTE data polarity (either normal or inverted) by placing an asterisk (*) at the
appropriate selection. To change the DTE data polarity, move cursor to the desired selection and press
ENTER.

Config Setup
DATA

DATA
*Normal

186

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

DATA
Inverted

6.9.1.6

RTS

The RTS menu shows the current DTE RTS operation mode (either activate or permanent) by placing an
asterisk (*) at the appropriate selection. To change the DTE RTS operation mode, move cursor to the desired
selection and press ENTER.

Config Setup
RTS

RTS
*Active

RTS
Permanent

6.9.1.7

TTM

TTM menu shows the current DTE terminal timing mode (either OFF or ON) by placing an asterisk (*) at the
appropriate selection. To change the DTE terminal timing mode, move cursor to the desired selection and
press ENTER.

Config Setup
TTM

TTM
*Off

TTM
On

6.9.1.8

DCD

DCD menu shows the current DTE DCD mode (either Normal or On) by placing an asterisk (*) at the
appropriate selection. To change the DTE DCD mode, move cursor to the desired selection and press ENTER.

Config Setup
DCD

187

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

DCD
*Normal

DCD
On

6.9.2

Port Status

Move the cursor to select Config Setup, press ENTER.

V35-CARD PORT D
Port Status

6.9.2.1

Exit RTS LOS

Under Port Status menu to select Exit RTS LOS, and move the cursor to NO or YES to setup Exit RTS LOS
then press ENTER.

Port Status
Exit RTS LOS

Exit RTS LOS


YES NO

6.9.2.2

CLK LOS DSR

Under Port Status menu to select CLK LOS DSR, and move the cursor to NO to setup Exit CLK LOS DSR then
press ENTER.

Port Status
CLK LOS DSR

CLK LOS DSR


NO NO

188

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.9.2.3

CTS DCD

Under Port Status menu to select CTS DCD, and move the cursor to NO to setup CTS DCD then press
ENTER.

Port Status
CTS DCD

CTS DCD
NO NO

6.9.2.4

DSR RTS

Under Port Status menu to select DSR RTS, and move the cursor to NO to setup DSR RTS then press
ENTER.

Port Status
DSR RTS

DSR RTS
NO NO

6.9.3

Port Alarm

Move the cursor to select Port Alarm, press ENTER.

V35-CARD PORT D
Port Alarm

6.9.3.1

Alarm Setup

Move the cursor to NEXT or PREV to view alarm, then go to EDIT option with pressing ENTER to do alarm
setup.

Port Alarm
Alarm Setup

Alarm Setup
Alarm Type

189

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.9.3.1.1

Alarm Type

Move the cursor to select Alarm Setup, press ENTER.

Alarm Setup
Alarm Type

6.9.3.1.2

Threshold

Move the cursor to select Threshold, press ENTER.

Alarm Setup
Threshold

6.9.3.2

Alarm History

Move the cursor to select Alarm History, press ENTER.

Port Alarm
Alarm History

Alarm History
OK MAJOR 0001

6.9.3.3

Alarm Clear

Pressing enter when cursor is on NEXT will move to the next alarm item. To confirm the existing option, move
cursor to EDIT and press ENTER. Then move cursor to the desired option and press ENTER.
The alarm queue can be cleared.

Port Alarm
Alarm Setup

Alarm Setup
Alarm Clear

Alarm Clear
Confirm?

190

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.9.4

Port Loopback

Move the cursor to select Port Loopback, press ENTER.

V35-CARD PORT D
Port Loopback

6.9.4.1

Local Loopback

Under Port Loopback menu, use left or right key to select Local Loopback menu. Under Local Loopback
sub-menu, use arrow keys to select a desired option.
Its sub-menus includes these options: OFF, TO_DTE and TO_WAN. The current selection is highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

Port Loopback
Local Loopback

Local Loopback
*OFF

Local Loopback
TO-DTE

Local Loopback
TO-WAN

6.9.5

Clock Source

Move the cursor to select Clock Source, press ENTER.

V35-CARD PORT D
Clock Source

6.9.5.1

Master Clock

The IP6700 provide operator to setup each ports clock source from internal, external, line (from A/B/C/D), or
WAN (from A/B/C/D). Move the cursor to select Master Clock press ENTER. The current selection is
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Clock Source
Master Clock

191

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Master Clock
*INTERNAL

Master Clock
EXTERNAL

Master Clock
PORT A (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT B (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT C (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT D (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT A (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT B (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT C (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT D (BUNDLE 0)

192

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.9.5.2

Second Clock

The IP6700 provide operator to setup each ports clock source from internal, external, line (from A/B/C/D), or
WAN (from A/B/C/D). Move the cursor to select Second Clock press ENTER. The current selection is
highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Clock Source
Second Clock

Second Clock
*INTERNAL

Second Clock
EXTERNAL

Second Clock
PORT A (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT B (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT C (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT D (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT A (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT B (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT C (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT D (BUNDLE 0)
193

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.9.5.3

Current Clock

Move the cursor to select Current Clock, press ENTER. The current selection is highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Clock Source
Current Clock

Current Clock
*MASTER_CLK

Current Clock
SECOND_CLK

Current Clock
INTERNAL

6.9.5.4

Recover Clock

Move the cursor to select Current Clock press ENTER. Under Recover clock sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: MANUAL and AUTOMATIC. The current selection is highlighted by an
asterisk (*).

Clock Source
Recover Clock

Recover Clock
*AUTOMATIC

Recover Clock
MANUAL

6.9.5.5

Clock status

Move the cursor to select Clock status, press ENTER.

Clock Source
Clock status

Clock status
NORMAL
194

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.10 E3/DS3 Menu


Config setup includes Tx Length and Xmt AIS menus.

IP6700
DS3-CARD PORT A

6.10.1

Config Setup

Move the cursor to select Config Setup, press ENTER.

DS3-CARD PORT A
Config Setup

6.10.1.1

Tx Length

Move the cursor to select Tx Length, press ENTER. The Length of TX could be from 0-255 or 255 to 450.

Config Setup
Tx Length

Tx Length
0-255

Tx Length
255-450

6.10.1.2

Xmt AIS

Move the cursor to select Xmt AIS, press ENTER. This action can be turned ON or OFF. When los happened,
the Xmt AIS decide to transmitted AIS to line or not. When los sent AIS, use arrow keys to select ON. If the los
do not send AIS, use arrow keys to select OFF.

Config Setup
Xmt AIS

Xmt AIS
ON

Xmt AIS
OFF

195

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.10.2

Port Status

Move the cursor to select Port Status, press ENTER.

Config Setup
Port Status

6.10.2.1

LOS XMT AIS

Under Port Status menu to select LOS XMT AIS, then Move the cursor to NO or YES to setup LOS XMT AIS,
press ENTER.

Port Status
LOS XMT AIS

LOS XMT AIS


No
YES

6.10.2.2

BPV ES

To setup the BPV ES, first move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Port Status
BPV ES

BPV ES
000 000

6.10.3

Port Alarm

Move the cursor to select Port Alarm, press ENTER.

Config Setup
Port Alarm

6.10.3.1

Alarm setup

Move the cursor to NEXT or PREV to view alarm, then go to EDIT option with pressing ENTER to do alarm
setup.

Port Alarm
Alarm setup

196

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.10.3.1.1 Alarm Type


Move the cursor to select Alarm Type, press ENTER. The alarm types include LOS, LCV, LES, SEFS, UAS,
BUNDLE and MAC.

Alarm setup
Alarm Type

Alarm Type
LOS

LOS
MAJOR

LOS
CRITI

LOS
MINOR

LOS
DIS

6.10.3.1.2 Threshold
Move the cursor to select Current Threshold press ENTER. Under Threshold sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: DS3 LCV, DS3 LES, DS3 SEFS and ES3 UAS. Then move the cursor
to the digit to be modified. Press enter.

Alarm setup
Threshold

DS3 LCV
1-9(number)

DS3 LES
1-65535(number)

197

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

DS3 SEFS
1-65535(number)

DS3 UAS
1-65535(number)

6.10.3.2

Port History

Move the cursor to select Current Port History, press ENTER. Under Port History sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option. The menu is used to show Alarm History.
Their submenu includes these options: PORT A LOS, PORT A LCV, PORT A LES, PORT A SEFS, PORT A
UAS, PORT A BUNDLE and PORT A MAC.

Config setup
Port History

PORT A LOS
OK MAJOR 0000

PORT A LCV
OK MAJOR 0000

PORT A LES
OK MAJOR 0000

PORT A SEFS
OK MAJOR 0000

PORT A UAS
OK MAJOR 0000

PORT A BUNDLE
OK MAJOR 0000

PORT A MAC
OK MAJOR 0000

198

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.10.3.3

Alarm clear

Pressing enter when cursor is on NEXT will move to the next alarm item. To confirm the existing option, move
cursor to EDIT and press ENTER. Then move cursor to the desired option and press ENTER.
The alarm queue can be cleared.

Config setup
Alarm clear

Alarm clear
Confirm?

6.10.4

Port lookback

Move the cursor to select Port Loopback, press ENTER.

Config Setup
Port loopback

6.10.4.1

Local Loopback

Move the cursor to select Current Local Loopback press ENTER. Under Local Loopback sub-menu, use arrow
keys to select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: OFF, LOCAL, PLB and LLB.

Port Loopback
Local Loopback

Local Loopback
OFF

Local Loopback
LOCAL

Local Loopback
PLB

Local Loopback
LLB

199

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

6.10.5

Clock Source

Move the cursor to select Clock Source, press ENTER.

Config Setup
Clock Source

6.10.5.1

Master Clock

The IP6700 provide operator to setup each ports clock source from internal, external, line (from A/B/C/D), or
WAN (from A/B/C/D). Move the cursor to select Master Clock press ENTER.

Clock Source
Master Clock

Master Clock
INTERNAL

Master Clock
EXTERNAL

Master Clock
PORT A (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT B (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT C (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT D (LINE)

Master Clock
PORT A (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT B (BUNDLE 0)

200

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Master Clock
PORT C (BUNDLE 0)

Master Clock
PORT D (BUNDLE 0)

6.10.5.2

Second Clock

The IP6700 provide operator to setup each ports clock source from internal, external, line (from A/B/C/D), or
WAN (from A/B/C/D). Move the cursor to select Second Clock press ENTER.

Clock Source
Second Clock

Second Clock
INTERNAL

Second Clock
EXTERNAL

Second Clock
PORT A (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT B (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT C (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT D (LINE)

Second Clock
PORT A (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT B (BUNDLE 0)
201

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation

Second Clock
PORT C (BUNDLE 0)

Second Clock
PORT D (BUNDLE 0)

6.10.5.3

Current Clock

Move the cursor to select Current Clock press ENTER. Its sub-menus include these options: Current Clock,
MASTER_CLK, SECOND_CLK and INTERNAL.

Clock Source
Current Clock

Current Clock
MASTER_CLK

Current Clock
SECOND_CLK

Current Clock
INTERNAL

6.10.5.4

Recover Clock

Move the cursor to select Current Clock press ENTER. Under Recover clock sub-menu, use arrow keys to
select a desired option.
Their submenu includes these options: MANUAL and AUTOMATIC

Clock Source
Recover Clock

Recover Clock
AUTOMATIC

Recover Clock
MANUAL

202

Chapter 6 Front Panel Operation


6.10.5.5

Clock Status

Move the cursor to select Clock Status press ENTER. Moving the arrow keys to Normal and pressing ENTER
must conclude this operation.

Clock Source
Clock Status

Clock Status
NORMAL

203

Chapter 7 Step by Step Operation

7 STEP BY STEP OPERATION


7.1 Time Slot IP Assignment
7.1.1

Time Slot IP Assignment (Add bundle)

Under the Main Menu, press T first then press W to get into the screen of Time Slot IP Assignment, then
choose Add bundle from the Action menu to create a new bundle.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
Port
: PO R T_ A
B u n dl e I D : 00
P O/ T S
A c t io n
: Ch a ng e b un d l e
= == = =
F o r ma t
: AA L 1
A 1
Tos
: 0
A 2
U D P Nu m be r : 1
A 3
T i m e S l ot : 0 0
A 4
T i m e S lo t #: 32
A 5
D e s t I P A dd r : 0 10 . 00 3. 0 0 9. 0 41 A 6
S t r at u m
:
3
A 7
C e l l i n B un d le : 5
A 8
J i t te r D e la y :
20
A 9
J i t te r S i ze :
256
A 10
V L A N:
OFF
A 11
V L A N1 ID :
0 0 00
A 12
V L A N1 pr i or i ty : 0
A 13
V L A N2 ID :
0 0 00
A 14
V L A N2 pr i or i ty : 0
A 15
C o n fi r m?
No
A 16

T S P O/ TS T S
= = = == == = =
1 A 17 1 7
2 A 18 1 8
3 A 19 19
4 A 20 20
5 A 21 2 1
6 A 22 2 2
7 A 23 2 3
8 A 24 2 4
9 A 25 2 5
1 0 A 26 2 6
1 1 A 27 2 7
1 2 A 28 2 8
1 3 A 29 2 9
1 4 A 30 3 0
1 5 A 31 3 1
16

1 8: 27 : 1 1 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

B ND L I D /U D P N UM D e s t I P A dd r es s
= == = == = == = == = == = = = == = == = == = == =
0
1 0 1 0 .0 0 3. 0 09 . 04 1
C el l N um J it t er D el a y Ji t te r S ize
= == = == = = == = == = == == = = == = == = == = ==
50
20
2 56

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >

Note: if it is unframed allocation, the bundle ID must be 0 and the Time Slot, Time Slot# will be skipped to
disallow user set up.
If the IP address is invalid. The error message will display.
C a n n o t g et ta r ge t m ac a dd r es s

After confirm the configuration. Press Y or N to re-confirm it.


A r e y o u s ur e [ Y /N ] ?

After save the configuration, the screen will refresh and display as follow
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
Port
: PO R T_ A
B u n dl e I D : 00
P O/ T S
A c t io n
: Ch a ng e b un d l e
= == = =
F o r ma t
: AA L 1
A 1
Tos
: 0
A 2
U D P Nu m be r : 1
A 3
T i m e S l ot : 0 0
A 4
T i m e S lo t #: 32
A 5
D e s t I P A dd r : 0 10 . 00 3. 0 0 9. 0 41 A 6
S t r at u m
:
3
A 7
C e l l i n B un d le : 5
A 8
J i t te r D e la y :
20
A 9
J i t te r S i ze :
256
A 10
V L A N:
OFF
A 11
V L A N1 ID :
0 0 00
A 12
V L A N1 pr i or i ty : 0
A 13
V L A N2 ID :
0 0 00
A 14
V L A N2 pr i or i ty : 0
A 15
C o n fi r m?
Ye s
A 16

T S P O/ TS T S
= = = == == = =
1 A 17 1 7
2 A 18 1 8
3 A 19 19
4 A 20 20
5 A 21 2 1
6 A 22 2 2
7 A 23 2 3
8 A 24 2 4
9 A 25 2 5
1 0 A 26 2 6
1 1 A 27 2 7
1 2 A 28 2 8
1 3 A 29 2 9
1 4 A 30 3 0
1 5 A 31 3 1
16

1 8: 27 : 1 1 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

B ND L I D /U D P N UM D e s t I P A dd r es s
= == = == = == = == = == = = = == = == = == = == =
0
1 0 1 0 .0 0 3. 0 09 . 04 1
C el l N um J it t er D el a y Ji t te r S ize
= == = == = = == = == = == == = = == = == = == = ==
50
20
2 56

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to ma i n m en u o r s a ve sy s te m s e tu p > >

204

Chapter 7 Step by Step Operation

To show all the information of time slot assignment which user has configured, Press J from the Main Menu
Configuration Menu.
L O O P I P6 7 00

= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =

P o rt Bu n dl e U D P C el ls J it t er
D es t I P A dd r e ss
ID
N u m Nu m D e la y /s i ze
= = == == = == = = = == == = = == == = = = == = == = == == = = ==
A
0
1 5
20 2 5 6 1 92 . 16 8 .1 00 . 1 01
B
0
2 5
20 2 5 6 1 92 . 16 8 .1 00 . 1 01

1 8: 32 : 2 3 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

St a tu s

T i me S l o t

Rx - co u nt e r

== = == = ==
in a ct i ve
in a ct i ve

= = == == = = =
1 to 31
1 to 31

== = == = == =
0
0

< < SP A CE ba r t o r e fr es h or ES C k e y r et u rn t o ma i n m en u > >

7.1.2 Time Slot IP Assignment (Delete bundle)


Choose the Delete bundle option from the Action menu. Then enter the valid bundle ID at the Bundle ID field.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
Port
: PO R T_ A
B u n dl e I D : 00
P O/ T S
A c t io n
: De l et e b un d l e
= == = =
F o r ma t
: AA L 1
A 1
Tos
: 00 0
A 2
U D P N u mb e r: 00 0 01
A 3
T i m e S lo t : 01
A 4
T i m e S lo t #: 31
A 5
D e s t I P A dd r : 1 92 . 16 8. 1 0 0. 1 01 A 6
S t r at u m
:
3
A 7
C e l l i n B un d le : 0 5
A 8
J i t te r D e la y :
020
A 9
J i t te r S i ze :
256
A 10
V L A N:
OFF
A 11
V L A N1 ID :
0 0 00
A 12
V L A N1 pr i or i ty : 0
A 13
V L A N2 ID :
0 0 00
A 14
V L A N2 pr i or i ty : 0
A 15
C o n fi r m?
Ye s
A 16

1 8: 33 : 1 4 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

T S P O/ TS T S B ND L I D /U D P N UM D e s t I P A dd r es s
= = = == == = = = == = == = == = == = == = = = == = == = == = == =
1 A 17 1 7
0
1 1 9 2 .1 6 8. 1 00 . 10 1
2 A 18 1 8
3 A 19 1 9 C el l N u m J it t er D e l ay Ji t te r S i ze
4 A 20 2 0 = == = == = = = == = == == = = = = == = == = == = ==
5 A 21 2 1
5
20
2 56
6 A 22 2 2
7 A 23 2 3
8 A 24 2 4
9 A 25 2 5
1 0 A 26 2 6
1 1 A 27 2 7
1 2 A 28 2 8
1 3 A 29 2 9
1 4 A 30 3 0
1 5 A 31 3 1
16

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to ma i n m en u o r s a ve sy s te m s e tu p > >

If the value which user has entered is invalid, the error message will display.
B u n dl e I D n o t e xi s te d!

After confirm the configuration. Press Y or N to re-confirm it.


A r e y o u s ur e [ Y /N ] ?

205

Chapter 7 Step by Step Operation


7.1.3 Time Slot IP Assignment (Delete all)
Choose the Delete all option from the Action menu. This option is used to clear all the bundles setup which
has been created.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= == Sy s te m S e tu p( M A P) == =
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B: RO L L O PT I ON S
Port
: PO R T_ A
B u n dl e I D : 00
P O/ T S
A c t io n
: De l et e a ll
= == = =
F o r ma t
: AA L 1
A 1
Tos
: 00 0
A 2
U D P N u mb e r: 00 0 01
A 3
T i m e S lo t : 01
A 4
T i m e S lo t #: 31
A 5
D e s t I P A dd r : 1 92 . 16 8. 1 0 0. 1 01 A 6
S t r at u m
:
3
A 7
C e l l i n B un d le : 0 5
A 8
J i t te r D e la y :
020
A 9
J i t te r S i ze :
256
A 10
V L A N:
OFF
A 11
V L A N1 ID :
0 0 00
A 12
V L A N1 pr i or i ty : 0
A 13
V L A N2 ID :
0 0 00
A 14
V L A N2 pr i or i ty : 0
A 15
C o n fi r m?
Ye s
A 16
C a n n o t g et ta r ge t m ac a dd r es s
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to ma i n

1 8: 33 : 1 4 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

T S P O/ TS T S B ND L I D /U D P N UM D e s t I P A dd r es s
= = = == == = = = == = == = == = == = == = = = == = == = == = == =
1 A 17 1 7
0
1 1 9 2 .1 6 8. 1 00 . 10 1
2 A 18 1 8
3 A 19 1 9 C el l N u m J it t er D e l ay Ji t te r S i ze
4 A 20 2 0 = == = == = = = == = == == = = = = == = == = == = ==
5 A 21 2 1
5
20
2 56
6 A 22 2 2
7 A 23 2 3
8 A 24 2 4
9 A 25 2 5
1 0 A 26 2 6
1 1 A 27 2 7
1 2 A 28 2 8
1 3 A 29 2 9
1 4 A 30 3 0
1 5 A 31 3 1
16
m en u o r s a ve sy s te m s e tu p > >

After confirm the configuration. Press Y or N to re-confirm it.


A r e y o u s ur e [ Y /N ] ?

7.2 Password Setup


Press S from the main menu to get into System Setup. Then press C to get into password setup.
7.2.1 Enter old password
Before making change of new password, user need to fill in the old password, the default password is LOOP.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= = = P as s wo r d Se t u p = ==
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt
E n ab l e P as s wo rd : Y E S
C h an g e P as s wo rd : Y E S
Old
P as s wo rd : _ _ __ _ __ _ __ _

> > P l ea s e i np u t o ld p a s sw o rd , t h en pr e ss E N T ER

206

1 8: 35 : 5 5 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

Chapter 7 Step by Step Operation

7.2.2 Enter new password


Enter the valid old password, then presses ENTER, the new password will be required to enter.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= = = P as s wo r d Se t u p = ==
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt
E n ab l e
C h an g e
Old
New

P as s wo rd
P as s wo rd
P as s wo rd
P as s wo rd

:
:
:
:

1 8: 35 : 5 5 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

YES
YES
X X XX _ __ _ __ _
X X XX _ __ _ __ _

> > P l ea s e i np u t n ew p a s sw o rd , t h en pr e ss E N T ER

7.2.3 Confirmation of new password


After confirm new password. Press Y, or N to save new password.
L O O P I P6 7 00
= = = P as s wo r d Se t u p = ==
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt
E n ab l e P as s wo rd :
C h an g e P as s wo rd :
Old
P as s wo rd :
New
P as s wo rd :
C o nf i rm Pa s sw or d :

YES
YES
X X XX _ __ _ __ _
X X XX _ __ _ __ _
X X XX _ __ _ __ _

> > S a ve ne w p a ss w or d ( Y /N ) ?

207

1 8: 35 : 5 5 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 00 8

Chapter 7 Step by Step Operation

7.3 Clock source setup


The IP6700 provide operator to setup each ports clock source from internal, external, line (from A/B/C/D), or
WAN (from A/B/C/D).
The basic application will show as below

Figure 7- 1

Clock Source

208

Chapter 7 Step by Step Operation


7.3.1

Clock Application

The wireline Ethernet network application diagram of IP6700 clock source shows below.

Figure 7- 2 Application Diagram of clock source

7.3.1.1

Example of clock source

For the clock source there are two examples to show as the table below. (TRAN SWITCH, PACK Trunk-4
Plus Device, Feb, 2006)
Table 7- 1 Example 1: unique clock source (from IP6700-1 line clock of Port A)
Port A

Port B

Port C

IP6700-1

Line clock A

Line clock A

Line clock A

IP6700-2

WAN clock A

IP6700-3

WAN clock A

IP6700-4

WAN clock A

Table 7- 2 Example 2: independent clock source


Port A

Port B

Port C

IP6700-1

Line clock A

Line clock B

Line clock C

IP6700-2

WAN clock A

IP6700-3

WAN clock A

IP6700-4

WAN clock A

209

Chapter 7 Step by Step Operation

7.4 Wire and Wireless Clock Setup


The application below lists the limitation for user to do wire and wireless setup.
7.4.1 Wireless application
The limitation of IP6700 wireless clock source diagram shows below.
Note: If independent clocks are used with T1 signals and the WAN port is transported over a
wireless network, a possibility of occasional 1 second pattern loss exists

Figure 7- 3 Wireless Application Diagram of clock source

210

Chapter 7 Step by Step Operation

7.4.2 Wireline application


There is no limitation for user to do wireline clock source setup

211

Chapter 8 Functional Description

8 Functional Description
8.1 TDMoEthernet Packet Format
To transport TDM data through packet switched networks, the PacketTrunk-4 encapsulates it into Ethernet
packets, as depicted in Figure 8-3. TDMoEthernet Encapsulation in an Ethernet Packet.

OPTIONAL

PREAMBLE
7 BYTES

START FRAME
DELIMITER

DESTINATIO
N ADDRESS

SOURCE
ADDRESS

VLAN
TAG

1 BYTES

6 BYTES

6 BYTES

2 BYTES

VLAN TAG
CONTROL
2 BYTES

TYPE

DATA AND
PADDING

FRAME CHECK
SEQUENCE

2 BYTES

46-1500
BYTES

4 BYTES

OPTIONAL
UDP/IP
HEADER
28 BYTES

TDMoIP
CONTROL WORD

TDMoIP
PAYLOAD

4 BYTES

Figure 8- 4 TDMoEthernet Encapsulation in an Ethernet Packet

Table 8- 3 Ethernet Packet Structure


Field

Description
A sequences of 56 bits (alternating 1 and 0 values) used for synchronization.

Preamble
Start frame

Gives components in the network time to detect the presence of a signal.


A sequence of 8 bits (10101011) that indicate the start of the packet.

delimiter
Destination and The Destination Address field identifies the station or stations that are to receive the packet.
The Source Address identifies the station that originated the packet. A Destination Address
source
may specify either an "individual address" destined for a single station, or a "multicast
address" destined for a group of stations. A Destination Address of all 1 bits refers to all
addresses
stations on the LAN and is called a "broadcast address".

212

Chapter 8 Functional Description

Table 8- 4 Ethernet Packet Structure (Cont.)


Field

Description

Type

Protocol type

Data and

This field contains the data transferred from the source station to the destination station or
stations. The maximum size of this field is 1500 bytes. If the size of this field is less than 46
bytes, then padding is used to bring the packet size up to the minimum length. A minimum
Ethernet packet size is 64 bytes from the Destination Address field through the Frame Check
Sequence.

padding

Frame check
sequence

This field contains a 4-byte cyclical redundancy check (CRC) value used for error checking.
When a source station assembles a packet, it performs a CRC calculation on all the bits in
the packet from the Destination Address through the Pad fields (that is, all fields except the
preamble, start frame delimiter, and frame check sequence).
The source station stores the value in this field and transmits it as part of the packet. When
the packet is received by the destination station, it performs an identical check. If the
calculated value does not match the value in this field, the destination station assumes an
error has occurred during transmission and discards the packet.

8.1.1

VLAN Option

The original Ethernet standards defined the minimum packet size as 64 bytes and the maximum as 1518
bytes. These numbers include all bytes from the Destination Address field through the Frame Check Sequence
field. The Preamble and Start Frame Delimiter fields are not included when quoting the size of a packet. The
IEEE 802.3ac standard released in 1998 extended the maximum allowable packet size to 1522 bytes to allow
a VLAN tag to be inserted into the Ethernet packet format. If present, the 2-byte VLAN tag is set to 0x8100, a
reserved Type field assignment indicating the presence of the VLAN tag and a traditional Type field 4 bytes
further into the packet.

The 2-byte VLAN Tag Control field consists of:


First 3 bits User Priority field, used to assign a priority level to the Ethernet packet
Next 1 bit Canonical Format Indicator indicating the presence of a Router Information Field
Last 12 bits VLAN Identifier, uniquely identifying the VLAN to which the Ethernet packet belongs.
The packet may contain two VLAN tags to support VLAN stacking.

213

Chapter 8 Functional Description

8.1.2

UDP/IP Header

Figure 8- 5 UDP/IP Header

Table 8- 5 IP Header Structure


Field

Description

IPVER
IHL
IP TOS
Total length
Identification
Flags
Fragment offset

IP version number, e.g. for IPv4 IPVER=4


Length in 32-bit words of the IP header, IHL=5
IP type of service
Length in octets of header and data
IP fragmentation identification
IP control flags; must be set to 010 to avoid fragmentation
Indicates where in the datagram the fragment belongs; not used for
TDMoEthernet
IP time to live field; datagrams with zero in this field are to be discarded
Must be set to 0x11 to signify UDP
Checksum for the IP header
IP address of the source
IP address of the destination

Time to live
Protocol
IP Header checksum
Source IP address
Destination IP address

214

Chapter 8 Functional Description

Table 8- 6 UDP Header Structure


Field
VER
Bundle number

Destination port
number
UDP length
UDP checksum

Description
TDMoEthernet version number. Presently VER=001
This field is usually dedicated to the Source Port Number, but here identifies the unique
data stream emanating from a given trunk and sharing a common destination. This
nonstandard use of a UDP port number is similar to
RTP/RTCP's use of port numbers to uniquely identify sessions, and the common
practice (sanctioned in H.225) of randomly allocating port numbers for VoIP sessions.
Here placing the bundle identifier in the UDP header rather than the application area
enables fast switching.
Possible values are:
1-8063: valid bundle numbers
0: reserved
8191 (1FFF): used for OAM control messages
the 127 ports 8064-8190: reserved.
Set to 0x085E (2142), the user port number which has been assigned to
TDMoEthernet by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA)
Length in octets of UDP header and data
Checksum of UDP/IP header and data. If not computed it must be set to zero.

8.1.3

TDMoEthernet Control Word

215

Chapter 8 Functional Description

Table 8- 7 TDMoEthernet Control Word Structure


Field

Description

FORMID

Format Identifier:
1100 AAL1 unstructured
1101 AAL1 structured
1110 AAL1 structured with CAS
1111 HDLC
Local loss of sync failure. This bit is set by the CPU. A set L bit indicates that the
source has detected or has been informed of a TDM physical layer fault
impacting the data to be transmitted. This bit can be used to indicate physical
layer LOS that should trigger AIS generation at the far end. Once set, if the TDM
fault is rectified, the L bit must be cleared.
Remote receive failure. This bit is set by the CPU. A set R bit indicates that the
source is not receiving packets at the Ethernet port, i.e., there is a failure of that
direction of the bi-directional connection. This indication can be used to signal
congestion or other network related faults. Receiving remote failure indication
may trigger fall-back mechanisms for congestion avoidance. The R bit must be
set after a preconfigured number of consecutive packets are not received, and
must be cleared once packets are once again received.
Reserved bits. Must be set to zero.
The length of the TDMoEthernet packet (control word and payload), in case
padding is employed to meet minimum transmission unit requirements of the
PSN. It is used if the total packet length (including PSN, control word, and
payload) is less than 64 bytes. Otherwise, it is set to zero.
TDMoEthernet sequence number, defined separately for each bundle and
incremented by one for each TDMoEthernet packet sent for that bundle. The
initial value of the sequence number is random (unpredictable) for security
purposes, and the value is incremented modulo 2 16 separately for each
bundle. Used by the receiver to detect packet loss and restore packet
sequence.

RES
Length

Sequence
number

8.1.4

TDMoEthernet Payload

This field can contain the following payload types:


AAL1
The AAL1 payload type detail is provided in theAAL1 Payload Type Machine as below.

216

Chapter 8 Functional Description

8.2 AAL1 PAYLOAD TYPE MACHINE


For the prevalent case for which the timeslot allocation is static and no activity detection is performed, the
payload can be efficiently encoded using constant bit rate AAL1 adaptation.
In the TDM to Ethernet direction, the AAL1 Payload Type machine concatenates the bundles timeslots
payload into structures and then slices it into 48-octet AAL1 cells. After adding the AAL1 header, the cells are
concatenated into the Ethernet packet payload.

Figure 8- 6 AAL1 Processing

217

Chapter 8 Functional Description

Table 8- 8 AAL1 Header Structure


Field
C

Length
[bits]
1

Description
Indicates if there is a pointer in the 2nd octet of the cell. When set, a pointer exists.

SN

Cell sequence number

CRC
P

3
1

E
Pointer

1
7

Error cyclic redundancy code on C and SN


Even parity bit on C, SN and CRC or the even byte parity LSB for the sequence number
octet (P format cells only)
(P format cells only) Even byte parity MSB for pointer octet
(P format cells only) Indicates the next structure boundary. It is always located at the
first possible position in the sequence number cycle, in which a structure
boundary occurs. The pointer indicates one of 93 octets (46 octets of the current cell +
47 octets of the next cell). P=0 indicates that the first octet of the current cells payload
is the first octet of the structure. P=93 indicates that the last octet of the next cell is the
final octet of the structure.

The AAL1 block supports the following bundle types:


Unstructured
Structured without CAS
Structured with CAS.
Unstructured bundles, as part of the E1/T1 interface, support rates of N 64 kbps, where N is the number of
timeslots configured to be assigned to a bundle. Unstructured bundles may also carry traffic of the whole
low-speed interface (up to 4.6 Mbps), T1 interface (1.544 Mbps) and high-speed interface (up to 51.84 Mbps).
The 47-octet AAL1 type cells payload contains 376 bits of pure TDM bit stream, without synchronization. Each
cell has a one-byte header containing sequence number and protection fields.

Structured without CAS bundles, as part of the E1/T1 interface, support rates of
N 64 kbps, where N is the number of timeslots configured to be assigned to a bundle. For this format, the
timeslots belonging to the bundle are sequentially placed in a structure, one octet per timeslot, until all 47
st
octets are filled. The 47th octet may contain a timeslot other than the last one in the bundle. Therefore the 1
octet of the next cell will contain the next timeslot of the same bundle.

218

Chapter 8 Functional Description

Figure 8- 7 AAL1 Processing for Structured without CAS Bundles

This means that each cell can start with a different timeslot. In order for the far end to recognize the first
timeslot in the bundle, a pointer to it is sent periodically in one of the 8 cells of every SN cycle. When this
pointer is sent, a P-format cell is used.

Structured with CAS bundles as part of the E1/T1 interface, support rates of N 64 kbps, where N is the
number of timeslots configured to be assigned to a bundle. For this format, the AAL1 header is identical with
the previously explained one. The addition of CAS only affects the structure contents. CAS data of one timeslot
is 4 bits long, meaning one octet can contain CAS data of 2 timeslots. Bundles containing an odd number of
timeslots need a padding of 4 zeroes in the last CAS octet. For example, a 3-timeslot bundle of an E1 frame
with CAS will yield the following structure octet sequence: TS1, TS2, TS3 repeated 16 times and then
CAS1+CAS2, CAS3+padding.

In the Ethernet to TDM direction, cells/packets of a bundle are being received only after the synchronization
process. The synchronization process includes cell SN synchronization, packet SN synchronization and
pointer synchronization. Cells with CRC or parity errors in their header are discarded. Pointer mismatch
imposes jitter buffer under-run and bundle resynchronization. Cell header errors or pointer errors may be
ignored depending on per-bundle configuration. Missing cells or packets are detected and restored in the jitter
buffer.

219

Chapter 8 Functional Description

8.3 Raw Payload Type Machine (SAToP and CESoPSN)


The RAW payload type machine supports the following bundle types:
Unstructured
According to IETF SAToP draft, ITU-T Y.1413, Metro Ethernet Forum MEF8, MFA (MPLS FR ATM) Forum IA
8.0.0.
Structured without CAS
According to IETF CESoPSN draft, ITU-T Y.1413, Metro Ethernet Forum MEF8, MFA (MPLS FR ATM) Forum
IA 8.0.0.
Structured with CAS
According to IETF CESoPSN draft, ITU-T Y.1413, Metro Ethernet Forum MEF8, MFA (MPLS FR ATM) Forum
IA 8.0.0.

8.3.1

Unstructured

Unstructured (=unframed) bundle will usually carry data of a whole TDM port. This port may be low speed such
as E1, T1 or Nx64K bit stream or high speed such as E3, T3 or STS1. In unstructured bundle, the TDM payload
is comprised of N TDM bytes. In the receiving device, the TDM data is extracted and inserted as a bit stream to
the jitter buffer, from where it is extracted afterwards and sent to the TDM port.

L2/L3
Header

Control
Word

TDM payload

CRC

FRG bits = 00
(no fragmentation)

TDM
bitstream
N TDM bytes

Figure 8- 8 SAToP Unstructured (=unframed) Ethernet Packet

The packetization delay of a SAToP bundle Ethernet packet is: T = N x 8 x bit time

220

Ethernet
packet

Chapter 8 Functional Description

8.3.2

Structure without CAS

In a structured (=framed) without CAS bundle, the TDM payload is comprised of N TDM frames data blocks.
Each block is assembled from the bundle3 assigned timeslots.

Figure 8- 9 Ethernet Packet of CESoPSN Structured without CAS (E1, Bundle with Timeslots 4 and 25)
The packetization delay of a CESoPSN structured without CAS bundle Ethernet packet is: T = N x 125 us

8.3.3

Structure without CAS (without Fragmentation)

In structured (=framed) with CAS bundle, the TDM payload is comprised of N TDM frames data blocks (each
data block is assembled from the bundle assigned timeslots) from a whole multiframe (e.g. N is 16 for E1)
followed by the CAS signaling substructure which contains the CAS info of the corresponding multiframe of the
bundle assigned timeslots.

Figure 8- 10 CESoPSN Structured with CAS (E1, Bundle with Timeslots 2, 4 and 25-Single Packet)

221

Chapter 8 Functional Description

Figure 8- 11 CESoPSN Structured with CAS (T1-ESF, Bundle with Timeslots 2, 4 - Single Packet)

In T1-SF, the multiframe structure is composed of 2 superframes resulting total of 24 TDM frames. The CAS
info in the end of the structure contains the CAS info of the 2 corresponding multiframes as well.

Figure 8- 12 CESoPSN Structured with CAS (T1-SF, Bundle with Timeslots 1, 4 and 24 - Single Packet)
The packetization delay of a CESoPSN structured (=framed) with CAS bundle Ethernet packet (not
fragmented) is as follows:
Multiframed E1: T = 2 ms
T1 SF, ESF: T = 3 ms.

222

Chapter 8 Functional Description

8.3.4 Structure without CAS (with Fragmentation)


In order to reduce the packetization delay of structured with CAS bundle packet the CESoPSN standard
supports the option of fragmentation. In this mode, the multiframe data structure is divided to several packets.
Each packet contains M TDM frames blocks. The last packet contains M TDM blocks followed by the entire
multiframe CAS information. Because of that, there is limited number of allowed "M" values:
For multi-framed E1: M = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 (16 means single packet with no fragmentation)
For T1 SF: M = 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24 (24 means single packet with no fragmentation)
For T1 ESF: M = 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24 (24 means single packet with no fragmentation)
The packetization delay of a CESoPSN structured with CAS bundle Ethernet packet (with fragmentation) is:
T = M x 125 us

Figure 8- 13 CESoPSN Structured with CAS (E1, Bundle with Timeslots 2, 4 and 25, with
Fragmentation)

223

9 Appendix A Proper Jitter Buffer Setup with the Loop IP6700 for
Appropriate Jitter Delay Application
This application is used to provide a hint for user to do proper jitter buffer setup.

In a packet network, the transit time delay of each packet is variable. When a TDM signal, such as E1,
traverses an IP Network, the jitter buffer allows the different packet delays to be compensated. The IP6700
allows the user to set the delay buffer size. Larger buffer size would handle larger IP jitter, but result in
increased signal delay. Small buffer size would minimize signal delay, but will have higher incidence of burst
error due to Ethernet traffic jitter. The IP6700 allows user to set the jitter buffer size to a maximum of 256 ms for
E1, 340 ms for T1. The default jitter buffer size is 20 ms, and the recommended jitter buffer size is 64 ms.

224

Glossary
AIS
AS
BES
BPV
CoS
CRC
CSS
DM
DS1
DS3
DTE
EFS
ES
FDL
IP
LCD
LAN
LED
LIU
LOF
LOS
NMS
PRBS
QRSS
RAI
SAToP
SES
SNMP
TDM
ToS
UAS
VLAN
WAN

Alarm Indication Signal


Available Second
Bursty Error Second
Bipolar Violation
Classification of Service
Cyclical Redundancy Check
Controlled Slip Second
Degraded Minute
Digital Signal, Level One - E1 or T1
Digital Signal, Level Three E3 or T3
Data Terminal Equipment-an end-user machine. E.g. PC or workstation
Error Free Second
Error Second
Facility Data Link
Internet Protocol
Liquid Crystal Display
Local Area Network
Light Emitting Diode
Line Interface Unit
Loss of Frame
Loss of Signal
Network Management System
Pseudo Random Binary Sequence
Quasi Random Signal Sequence
Remote Alarm Indication
Structure Agnostic TDM over Packet
Severe Error Second
Simple Network Management Protocol
Time Division Multiplexing
Type of Service
Unavailable Second
Virtual LAN Area Network
WAN wide Area Network

225

Вам также может понравиться